sisgm1040-184d-lrt - Transition Networks

SISGM1040-184D-LRT
12-Port Managed Industrial Ethernet Switch
Web User Guide
33710 Rev A
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Safety Warnings and Cautions
These products are not intended for use in life support products where failure of a product could reasonably be
expected to result in death or personal injury. Anyone using this product in such an application without express
written consent of an officer of Transition Networks does so at their own risk, and agrees to fully indemnify
Transition Networks for any damages that may result from such use or sale.
Attention: this product, like all electronic products, uses semiconductors that can be damaged by ESD (electrostatic
discharge). Always observe appropriate precautions when handling.
Note:
Emphasizes important information or calls your attention to related features or instructions.
Warning: Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause personal injury.
Caution: Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause loss of data, or damage the system or equipment.
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide - TN PN 33710 Rev. A
Record of Revisions
Rev
A
Date
Description of Changes
3/14/17
Initial release for software v1.00.
Trademark notice: All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. All other
products or service names used in this publication are for identification purposes only, and may be trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective companies. All other trademarks or registered trademarks mentioned
herein are the property of their respective holders.
Copyright restrictions: © 2017 Transition Networks, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced
or used in any form or by any means (graphic, electronic, or mechanical) without written permission from Transition
Networks.
Address comments on this product or manual to:
Transition Networks Inc.
10900 Red Circle Drive, Minnetonka, MN 55343
tel: +1.952.941.7600 | toll free: 1.800.526.9267 | fax: 952.941.2322
sales@transition.com
33710 Rev. A
|
techsupport@transition.com
|
customerservice@transition.com
https://www.transition.com
Page 2 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
CONTENTS
1. Introduction................................................................................................................................... 10
1.1
System Description .......................................................................................................................... 10
1.2
Using the Web Interface.................................................................................................................. 10
1.2.1.1 Web Browser Support....................................................................................................... 10
1.2.1.2 System Navigation ............................................................................................................ 11
1.2.1.3 Title Bar Icons ................................................................................................................... 11
1.2.1.4 Ending a Session ............................................................................................................... 12
1.2.1.5 Resetting to Factory Defaults ............................................................................................ 12
1.3
Related Manuals .............................................................................................................................. 12
2. Using the Web UI ........................................................................................................................... 13
2.1
Login ................................................................................................................................................ 13
2.2
Tree View (Menu System) ............................................................................................................... 13
2.3
Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 14
2.3.1.1 System............................................................................................................................... 14
2.3.1.2 System Information........................................................................................................... 14
2.3.1.3 System IP ........................................................................................................................... 15
2.3.1.4 System NTP ....................................................................................................................... 18
2.3.1.5 System Time ...................................................................................................................... 19
2.3.1.6 System Log ........................................................................................................................ 22
2.3.1.7 System Alarm Profile......................................................................................................... 23
Green Ethernet ................................................................................................................................ 24
2.3.1.8 Port Power Savings ........................................................................................................... 24
2.3.1.9 Ports .................................................................................................................................. 26
2.3.1.10 DHCP ................................................................................................................................. 28
2.3.1.11 DHCP Server ...................................................................................................................... 28
2.3.1.12 DHCP Server Mode ........................................................................................................... 28
2.3.1.13 DHCP Server Excluded IP .................................................................................................. 30
2.3.1.14 DHCP Server Pool .............................................................................................................. 31
2.3.1.15 DHCP Snooping ................................................................................................................. 32
2.3.1.16 DHCP Relay........................................................................................................................ 33
2.3.1.17 Security ............................................................................................................................. 35
2.3.1.18 Switch................................................................................................................................ 35
2.3.1.19 Users ................................................................................................................................. 35
2.3.1.20 Privilege Level ................................................................................................................... 37
2.3.1.21 Auth Method .................................................................................................................... 39
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 3 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.22 SSH .................................................................................................................................... 40
2.3.1.23 HTTPS ................................................................................................................................ 41
2.3.1.24 Access Management ......................................................................................................... 42
2.3.1.25 SNMP ................................................................................................................................ 44
2.3.1.26 SNMP System Configuration ............................................................................................. 44
2.3.1.27 SNMP Trap Configuration ................................................................................................. 46
2.3.1.28 SNMP Communities .......................................................................................................... 51
2.3.1.29 SNMP Users ...................................................................................................................... 52
2.3.1.30 SNMP Groups .................................................................................................................... 54
2.3.1.31 SNMP Views ...................................................................................................................... 55
2.3.1.32 SNMP Access..................................................................................................................... 56
2.3.1.33 RMON ............................................................................................................................... 58
2.3.1.34 RMON Statistics ................................................................................................................ 58
2.3.1.35 RMON History ................................................................................................................... 59
2.3.1.36 RMON Alarm ..................................................................................................................... 60
2.3.1.37 RMON Event ..................................................................................................................... 62
2.3.1.38 Network ............................................................................................................................ 63
2.3.1.39 Limit Control ..................................................................................................................... 63
2.3.1.40 NAS ................................................................................................................................... 66
2.3.1.41 ACL .................................................................................................................................... 76
2.3.1.42 ACL Port ............................................................................................................................ 76
2.3.1.43 ACL Rate Limiters .............................................................................................................. 78
2.3.1.44 Access Control List ............................................................................................................ 79
2.3.1.45 IP Source Guard ................................................................................................................ 91
2.3.1.46 IP Source Guard Configuration ......................................................................................... 91
2.3.1.47 IP Source Guard Static Table ............................................................................................. 93
2.3.1.48 ARP Inspection .................................................................................................................. 94
2.3.1.49 Port Configuration ............................................................................................................ 94
2.3.1.50 VLAN Mode Configuration ................................................................................................ 96
2.3.1.51 Static ARP Inspection Table............................................................................................... 97
2.3.1.52 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table ......................................................................................... 98
2.3.1.53 AAA ................................................................................................................................. 100
2.3.1.54 RADIUS ............................................................................................................................ 100
2.3.1.55 TACACS+ .......................................................................................................................... 102
2.3.1.56 Aggregation..................................................................................................................... 104
2.3.1.57 Static Aggregation ........................................................................................................... 104
2.3.1.58 LACP Aggregation............................................................................................................ 106
2.3.1.59 Loop Protection .............................................................................................................. 108
2.3.1.60 Spanning Tree ................................................................................................................. 110
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 4 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.61 Bridge Settings ................................................................................................................ 110
2.3.1.62 MSTI Mapping ................................................................................................................. 112
2.3.1.63 MSTI Priorities................................................................................................................. 114
2.3.1.64 CIST Ports ........................................................................................................................ 115
2.3.1.65 MSTI Ports ....................................................................................................................... 117
2.3.1.66 IPMC Profile .................................................................................................................... 119
2.3.1.67 Profile Table .................................................................................................................... 119
2.3.1.68 Address Entry .................................................................................................................. 121
2.3.1.69 MVR ................................................................................................................................ 122
2.3.1.70 IPMC................................................................................................................................ 125
2.3.1.71 IGMP Snooping ............................................................................................................... 125
2.3.1.72 Basic Configuration ......................................................................................................... 125
2.3.1.73 VLAN Configuration ........................................................................................................ 127
2.3.1.74 Port Filtering Profile ........................................................................................................ 129
2.3.1.75 MLD Snooping................................................................................................................. 130
2.3.1.76 Basic Configuration ......................................................................................................... 130
2.3.1.77 VLAN Configuration ........................................................................................................ 132
2.3.1.78 Port Filtering Profile ........................................................................................................ 134
2.3.1.79 LLDP ................................................................................................................................ 135
2.3.1.80 LLDP ................................................................................................................................ 135
2.3.1.81 LLDP-MED ....................................................................................................................... 138
2.3.1.82 MAC Table ....................................................................................................................... 144
2.3.1.83 VLANs .............................................................................................................................. 146
2.3.1.84 Private VLANs.................................................................................................................. 150
2.3.1.85 Membership.................................................................................................................... 150
2.3.1.86 Port Isolation................................................................................................................... 152
2.3.1.87 VCL .................................................................................................................................. 153
2.3.1.88 MAC-based VLAN ............................................................................................................ 153
2.3.1.89 Protocol-based VLAN ...................................................................................................... 155
2.3.1.90 Protocol to Group ........................................................................................................... 155
2.3.1.91 Group to VLAN ................................................................................................................ 157
2.3.1.92 IP Subnet-based VLAN .................................................................................................... 159
2.3.1.93 Voice VLAN ...................................................................................................................... 161
2.3.1.94 Voice VLAN Configuration ............................................................................................... 161
2.3.1.95 Voice VLAN OUI............................................................................................................... 163
2.3.1.96 QoS.................................................................................................................................. 164
2.3.1.97 Port Classification ........................................................................................................... 164
2.3.1.98 Port Policing .................................................................................................................... 166
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 5 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.99 Port Scheduler ................................................................................................................ 167
2.4
2.3.1.100
Port Shaping ....................................................................................................... 169
2.3.1.101
Port Tag Remarking ............................................................................................ 170
2.3.1.102
Port DSCP ........................................................................................................... 171
2.3.1.103
DSCP-Based QoS................................................................................................. 173
2.3.1.104
DSCP Translation ................................................................................................ 174
2.3.1.105
DSCP Classification ............................................................................................. 175
2.3.1.106
QoS Control List .................................................................................................. 176
2.3.1.107
Storm Control ..................................................................................................... 180
2.3.1.108
Mirror ................................................................................................................. 181
2.3.1.109
GVRP................................................................................................................... 183
2.3.1.110
GVRP Global Config ............................................................................................ 183
2.3.1.111
GVRP Port Config................................................................................................ 184
2.3.1.112
sFlow .................................................................................................................. 185
2.3.1.113
Redundant Ring & Chain Configuration ............................................................. 188
2.3.1.114
DDMI Configuration ........................................................................................... 195
Monitor ......................................................................................................................................... 196
2.4.1.1 System............................................................................................................................. 196
2.4.1.2 System Information......................................................................................................... 196
2.4.1.3 CPU Load ......................................................................................................................... 197
2.4.1.4 IP Status .......................................................................................................................... 198
2.4.1.5 System Log ...................................................................................................................... 200
2.4.1.6 Detailed System Log ........................................................................................................ 202
2.4.1.7 System Alarm .................................................................................................................. 203
2.4.1.9 Green Ethernet ............................................................................................................... 205
2.4.1.10 Port Power Savings Data ................................................................................................. 205
2.4.1.11 Ports ................................................................................................................................ 206
2.4.1.12 Ports State Overview ...................................................................................................... 206
2.4.1.13 Trafic Overview ............................................................................................................... 206
2.4.1.14 QoS Statistics .................................................................................................................. 208
2.4.1.15 QCL Status ....................................................................................................................... 209
2.4.1.16 Detailed Statistics............................................................................................................ 211
2.4.1.17 DHCP ............................................................................................................................... 213
2.4.1.18 DHCP Server .................................................................................................................... 213
2.4.1.19 Statistics .......................................................................................................................... 213
2.4.1.20 Binding ............................................................................................................................ 215
2.4.1.21 Declined IP ...................................................................................................................... 216
2.4.1.22 DHCP Snooping Table...................................................................................................... 217
2.4.1.23 DHCP Relay Statistics ...................................................................................................... 219
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 6 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.24 DHCP Detailed Statistics ................................................................................................. 221
2.4.1.25 Security ........................................................................................................................... 223
2.4.1.26 Access Management Statistics........................................................................................ 223
2.4.1.27 Network .......................................................................................................................... 224
2.4.1.28 Port Security ................................................................................................................... 224
2.4.1.29 Switch.............................................................................................................................. 224
2.4.1.30 Port ................................................................................................................................. 227
2.4.1.31 NAS ................................................................................................................................. 229
2.4.1.32 Switch.............................................................................................................................. 229
2.4.1.33 Port ................................................................................................................................. 230
2.4.1.34 ACL Status ....................................................................................................................... 233
2.4.1.35 ARP Inspection ................................................................................................................ 235
2.4.1.36 IP Source Guard .............................................................................................................. 237
2.4.1.37 AAA ................................................................................................................................. 238
2.4.1.38 RADIUS Overview............................................................................................................ 238
2.4.1.39 RADIUS Details ................................................................................................................ 240
2.4.1.40 Switch.............................................................................................................................. 241
2.4.1.41 RMON ............................................................................................................................. 241
2.4.1.42 Statistics .......................................................................................................................... 241
2.4.1.43 History............................................................................................................................. 243
2.4.1.44 Alarm .............................................................................................................................. 245
2.4.1.45 Event ............................................................................................................................... 246
2.4.1.46 LACP ................................................................................................................................ 247
2.4.1.47 System Status .................................................................................................................. 247
2.4.1.48 Port Status ...................................................................................................................... 248
2.4.1.49 Port Statistics .................................................................................................................. 249
2.4.1.50 Loop Protection .............................................................................................................. 250
2.4.1.51 Spanning Tree ................................................................................................................. 251
2.4.1.52 Bridge Status ................................................................................................................... 251
2.4.1.53 Port Status ...................................................................................................................... 253
2.4.1.54 Port Statistics .................................................................................................................. 254
2.4.1.55 MVR ................................................................................................................................ 255
2.4.1.56 MVR Statistics ................................................................................................................. 255
2.4.1.57 MVR Channel Groups...................................................................................................... 256
2.4.1.58 MVR SFM Information .................................................................................................... 257
2.4.1.59 IPMC................................................................................................................................ 259
2.4.1.60 IGMP Snooping ............................................................................................................... 259
2.4.1.61 IGMP Snooping Status .................................................................................................... 259
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 7 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.62 Groups Information ........................................................................................................ 261
2.4.1.63 IPv4 SFM Information ..................................................................................................... 262
2.4.1.64 MLD Snooping................................................................................................................. 264
2.4.1.65 MLD Snooping Status ...................................................................................................... 264
2.4.1.66 Groups Information ........................................................................................................ 266
2.4.1.67 IPv6 SFM Information ..................................................................................................... 267
2.4.1.68 LLDP ................................................................................................................................ 269
2.4.1.69 Neighbors ........................................................................................................................ 269
2.4.1.70 LLDP-MED Neighbors ...................................................................................................... 271
2.4.1.71 EEE .................................................................................................................................. 276
2.4.1.72 Port Statistics .................................................................................................................. 278
2.4.1.73 MAC Table ....................................................................................................................... 280
2.4.1.74 VLANs .............................................................................................................................. 282
2.4.1.75 VLANs Membership ........................................................................................................ 282
2.4.1.76 VLANs Ports..................................................................................................................... 284
2.4.1.77 VCL .................................................................................................................................. 286
2.4.1.78 MAC-Based VLAN ............................................................................................................ 286
2.4.1.79 sFlow ............................................................................................................................... 287
2.4.1.80 Redundant Ring & Chain Monitoring .............................................................................. 289
2.4.1.81 DDMI Monitoring ............................................................................................................ 291
2.4.1.82 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 291
2.4.1.83 Detailed........................................................................................................................... 292
2.5
Diagnostics .................................................................................................................................... 293
2.5.1.1 Ping ................................................................................................................................. 293
2.5.1.2 Ping6 ............................................................................................................................... 295
2.5.1.3 VeriPHY ........................................................................................................................... 297
2.6
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................. 299
2.6.1.1 Restart Device ................................................................................................................. 299
2.6.1.2 Factory Default................................................................................................................ 300
2.6.1.3 Software.......................................................................................................................... 301
2.6.1.4 Software Upload ............................................................................................................. 301
2.6.1.5 Image Select.................................................................................................................... 302
2.6.1.6 Configuration .................................................................................................................. 303
2.6.1.7 Save startup-config ......................................................................................................... 303
2.6.1.8 Download Configuration ................................................................................................. 304
2.6.1.9 Upload Configuration...................................................................................................... 305
2.6.1.10 Activate Configuration .................................................................................................... 306
2.6.1.11 Delete Configuration File ................................................................................................ 307
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 8 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
3. Technical Specifications ................................................................................................................ 308
4. Service, Warranty, and Tech Support ............................................................................................. 312
5. Compliance Information ............................................................................................................... 312
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 313
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 9 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
1. Introduction
1.1 System Description
Transition Networks’ SISGM1040-184D-LRT industrial Ethernet switch delivers high quality, wide operating
temperature range, extended power input range, IP-30 design, and advanced VLAN and QoS features.
This switch is ideal for harsh environments and mission critical applications. Managed QoS provides
enterprise-class networking features to fulfill the needs of large network infrastructure and extreme
environments.
The SISGM1040-184D-LRT eases the effort to build a network infrastructure which offers reliable, well managed
and high quality networking for any business requiring continuous and well-protected services in management
environments. With features such as Fast Failover ring protection and QoS, customers can ensure their network
is qualified to deliver real-time high quality applications.
1.2
Using the Web Interface
This manual addresses the features, design, layout and operation of the web UI.
1.2.1.1
Web Browser Support
IE 7 (or newer version) with the following default settings is recommended:
Language script
Web page font
Plain text font
Encoding
Text size
Latin based
Times New Roman
Courier New
Unicode (UTF-8)
Medium
Firefox with the following default settings is recommended:
Web page font
Encoding
Text size
Times New Roman
Unicode (UTF-8)
16
Google Chrome with the following default settings is recommended:
Web page font
Encoding
Text size
33710 Rev. A
Times New Roman
Unicode (UTF-8)
Medium
https://www.transition.com
Page 10 of 328
Transition Networks
1.2.1.2
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
System Navigation
All of the Web UI main screens can be viewed by clicking on hyperlinks in the four menu boxes on the left side
of the screen: Configuration, Monitor, Diagnostics, and Maintenance.
1.2.1.3
Title Bar Icons
The Web UI startup screen (the System Information page) is shown below.
Show Help Button
Each screen has a Help button that displays a page of information relevant to the particular screen. The Help is
displayed in a new window. Each web page of Configuration/Status/System functions has a corresponding help
page. For more information about any screen, click on the Help button on the screen; help information is
displayed in a new window.
Logout Button
Click the Logout button to display a webpage message confirming that you want to logout of the web site. Click
the OK button to confirm that you want to logout, or click the Cancel button to remain logged in.
When you log out, the Login page displays again.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 11 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Save Button
If any unsaved change has been made to the configuration (by you during this or a prior session, or by any
other administrator using the web interface or the CLI), a Save icon displays in the title line. To save the running
configuration to the startup configuration:
1.
Click on the Save icon. The System/Save and Restore screen displays.
2.
Click on Submit next to Data Control Action drop-down list on top of System/Save and Restore screen.
The Save button on each page only saves the config in RAM; always remember to save the config in flash once
all the changes are done.
1.2.1.4
Ending a Session
To end a session, close your web browser. This prevents an unauthorized user from accessing the system using
your user name and password.
1.2.1.5
Resetting to Factory Defaults
Note that only the telnet interface is capable of bringing back the factory default IP address.
The factory default IP address would be retained after defaulting via the Web UI. To bring back factory defaults,
use the commands below:
# reload defaults (including reload the default IP address)
or
# reload defaults keep-ip (reload factory defaults, but keep the current IP address)
# copy running-config startup-config
See the CLI Reference for additional information.
1.3 Related Manuals
These manuals give additional information on how to operate the switch:

SISGM1040-184D-LRT Quick Start Guide, 33708

SISGM1040-184D-LRT Install Guide, 33709

SISGM1040-184D-LRT CLI Reference, 33711
For Transition Networks Drivers, Firmware, Manual, etc. go to the Product Support webpage (logon required).
For Transition Networks Application Notes, Brochures, Data Sheets, Specifications, etc. go to the Support
Library (no logon required). Note that this manual provides links to third party web sites for which Transition
Networks is not responsible.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 12 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2. Using the Web UI
2.1 Login
See the SISGM1040-184D-LRT Install Guide for installation details.
Operation
1. Enter Username and Password.
2. Click “Sign in”.
Field
Description
Username
Login user name. The maximum length is 32.
Default: root
Password
Login user password. The maximum length is 32.
Default: root
2.2 Tree View (Menu System)
The tree view provides the Web UI menu system. It lets you quickly to get to the desired page for Configuration,
Monitoring, Diagnostics, or Maintenance.
Configuration menu
Monitor menu
Diagnostics menu
Maintenance menu
Each of the Web UI main menus is described in the following sections.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 13 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3 Configuration
2.3.1.1
System
2.3.1.2
System Information
Configure the switch system information here.
Object
Description
The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node, together
System Contact
with information on how to contact this person. The allowed string length is 0 to
255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126.
An administratively assigned name for this managed node. By convention, this is
the node's fully-qualified domain name. A domain name is a text string drawn from
System Name
the alphabet (A-Za-z), digits (0-9), minus sign (-). No space characters are permitted
as part of a name. The first character must be an alpha character. And the first or
last character must not be a minus sign. The allowed string length is 0 to 255.
The physical location of this node (e.g., telephone closet, 3rd floor). The allowed
System Location
string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to
126.
Buttons
Click to save changes immediately.
Click to revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 14 of 328
Transition Networks
2.3.1.3
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
System IP
Configure IP basic settings, control IP interfaces and IP routes here. Up to eight interfaces and up to 32
routes are supported.
Object
Description
IP Configuration
Configure whether the IP stack should act as a Host or a Router.
Mode
In Host mode, IP traffic between interfaces will not be routed.
In Router mode traffic is routed between all interfaces.
This setting controls the DNS name resolution done by the switch. The following modes
are supported:
From any DHCP interfaces : The first DNS server offered from a DHCP lease to a
DHCP-enabled interface will be used.
DNS Server
No DNS server : No DNS server will be used.
Configured : Explicitly provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal
notation.
From this DHCP interface : Specify from which DHCP-enabled interface a provided
DNS server should be preferred.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 15 of 328
Transition Networks
DNS Proxy
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
When DNS proxy is enabled, system will relay DNS requests to the currently configured
DNS server, and reply as a DNS resolver to the client devices on the network.
IP Interfaces
Delete
VLAN
Select this option to delete an existing IP interface.
The VLAN associated with the IP interface. Only ports in this VLAN will be able to access
the IP interface. This field is only available for input when creating a new interface.
Enable the DHCP client by checking this box. If this option is enabled, the system will
IPv4 DHCP Enabled
configure the IPv4 address and mask of the interface using the DHCP protocol. The DHCP
client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup.
The number of seconds for trying to obtain a DHCP lease. After this period expires, a
IPv4 DHCP Fallback
configured IPv4 address will be used as IPv4 interface address. A value of zero disables
Timeout
the fallback mechanism, such that DHCP will keep retrying until a valid lease is obtained.
Legal values are 0 to 4294967295 seconds.
IPv4 DHCP Current Lease
For DHCP interfaces with an active lease, this column show the current interface address,
as provided by the DHCP server.
The IPv4 address of the interface in dotted decimal notation.
IPv4 Address
If DHCP is enabled, this field configures the fallback address. The field may be left blank if
IPv4 operation on the interface is not desired - or no DHCP fallback address is desired.
The IPv4 network mask, in number of bits (prefix length). Valid values are between 0 and
30 bits for an IPv4 address.
IPv4 Mask
If DHCP is enabled, this field configures the fallback address network mask. The field may
be left blank if IPv4 operation on the interface is not desired - or no DHCP fallback address
is desired.
The IPv6 address of the interface. An IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as
eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field (:). For
example, fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7. The symbol :: is a special syntax that can be
IPv6 Address
used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it
can appear only once. It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For
example, ::192.1.2.34.
The field may be left blank if IPv6 operation on the interface is not desired.
The IPv6 network mask, in number of bits (prefix length). Valid values are between 1 and
IPv6 Mask
128 bits for an IPv6 address.
The field may be left blank if IPv6 operation on the interface is not desired.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 16 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Default Gateway
Address
The IP address of the gateway valid format is dotted decimal notation (e.g.,
192.168.1.254).
IP Routes
Delete
Select this option to delete an existing IP route.
The destination IP network or host address of this route. Valid format is dotted decimal
Network
notation or a valid IPv6 notation. A default route can use the value 0.0.0.0or IPv6 ::
notation.
The destination IP network or host mask, in number of bits (prefix length). It defines how
Mask Length
much of a network address that must match, in order to qualify for this route. Valid values
are between 0 and 32 bits respectively 128 for IPv6 routes. Only a default route will have a
mask length of 0 (as it will match anything).
Gateway
The IP address of the IP gateway. Valid format is dotted decimal notation or a valid IPv6
notation. Gateway and Network must be of the same type.
The VLAN ID (VID) of the specific IPv6 interface associated with the gateway.
The given VID ranges from 1 to 4094 and will be effective only when the corresponding
Next Hop VLAN
(Only for IPv6)
IPv6 interface is valid.
If the IPv6 gateway address is link-local, it must specify the next hop VLAN for the
gateway.
If the IPv6 gateway address is not link-local, system ignores the next hop VLAN for the
gateway.
Buttons
Click to add a new IP interface. A maximum of 8 interfaces is supported.
Click to save changes.
Click to add a new IP route. A maximum of 32 routes is supported.
Click to save changes immediately.
Click to revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 17 of 328
Transition Networks
2.3.1.4
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
System NTP
Configure NTP (Network Timing Protocol) on this page.
Object
Description
Indicates the NTP mode operation. Possible modes are:
Mode
Enabled: Enable NTP client mode operation.
Disabled: Disable NTP client mode operation.
Provide the IPv4 or IPv6 address of a NTP server. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records
represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field
Server #
(:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can be
used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it
can appear only once. It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example,
'::192.1.2.34'.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 18 of 328
Transition Networks
2.3.1.5
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
System Time
This page lets you configure the Time Zone and Daylight Savings Time (DST) from the Configuration >
System > NTP menu path.
Object
Description
Time Zone Configuration
Time Zone
Acronym
33710 Rev. A
Lists various Time Zones worldwide. Select appropriate Time Zone from the drop
down and click Save to set.
User can set the acronym of the time zone. This is a User configurable acronym to
identify the time zone. ( Range : 0 to 16 characters )
https://www.transition.com
Page 19 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Daylight Saving Time Configuration
This is used to set the clock forward or backward according to the configurations set
below for a defined Daylight Saving Time duration. Select 'Disable' to disable the
Daylight Saving Time
Daylight Saving Time configuration. Select 'Recurring' and configure the Daylight
Saving Time duration to repeat the configuration every year. Select 'Non-Recurring'
and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration for single time configuration.
( Default : Disabled )
Recurring Configurations
Start time settings
Week
Select the starting week number.
Day
Select the starting day.
Month
Select the starting month.
Hours
Select the starting hour.
Minutes
Select the starting minute
End time settings
Week
Select the ending week number.
Day
Select the ending day.
Month
Select the ending month.
Hours
Select the ending hour.
Minutes
Select the ending minute
Offset settings
Offset
Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time. ( Range: 1 to 1440 )
Non Recurring Configurations
Start time settings
Month
Select the starting month.
Date
Select the starting date.
Year
Select the starting year.
Hours
Select the starting hour.
Minutes
Select the starting minute
End time settings
Month
Select the ending month.
Date
Select the ending date.
Year
Select the ending year (2000 - 2037).
Hours
Select the ending hour. (0-23)
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 20 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Minutes
Select the ending minute (0-59).
Seconds
Select the ending second (0-59).
Offset settings
Offset
Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time. ( Range: 1 to 1440 )
Date/Time Configuration
Date/Time Settings
Year
Current year of date/time (range: 2000 to 2037 ).
Month
Current month of current date/time.
Date
Current date of current date/time.
Hours
Current hour of current date/time.
Minutes
Current minute of current date/time.
Seconds
Current second of current date/time.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 21 of 328
Transition Networks
2.3.1.6
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
System Log
Configure System Logging (SysLog) on this page.
Object
Description
Indicates the server mode of operation. When enabled, the syslog message is sent to the
syslog server. The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP
port 514 and the syslog server will not send acknowledgments back to the sender since
Server Mode
UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments.
The syslog packet will always be sent out even if the syslog server does not exist. Possible
modes are:
Enabled: Enable server mode operation.
Disabled: Disable server mode operation.
Server Address
Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server. If the switch provide DNS feature, it can
also be a host name.
Indicates what kind of message to send to the syslog server. Possible modes are:
Info: Send informations, warnings and errors.
Syslog Level
Warning: Send warnings and errors.
Error: Send errors.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 22 of 328
Transition Networks
2.3.1.7
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
System Alarm Profile
The Alarm Profile table is provided here to enable/disable the alarm. Note: When any alarm exists, the
Alarm LED will be on (lit); the Alarm Output Relay will also be enabled.
Object
ID
Description
The identification number of the Alarm Profile entry. Note that the top row has an ID of *
which indicates this as a “select all” function.
Description
A description of the Alarm Type (e.g., Port x Link Down, Power Alarm).
If alarm entry is Enabled, then alarm will be shown in alarm history/current when it occurs.
Enabled
The Alarm LED will be on (lit), The Alarm Relay will also be enabled.
An SNMP trap will be sent if any SNMP trap entry exists and is enabled.
Disabled
If alarm entry is Disabled, then alarm will not be captured/shown in alarm history/current
when alarm occurs; then it will not trigger the Alarm LED change, Alarm Relay or SNMP trap.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 23 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Green Ethernet
2.3.1.8
Port Power Savings
This page lets you configure copper port power savings features.
Object
Description
Port Power Savings Configuration
Optimize EEE for
The switch can be set to optimize EEE for either best power saving or least traffic latency.
Port Configuration
Port
The switch port number of the logical port. Note that the top row has an ID of * which indicates
this as a “select all” function.
ActiPHY
PerfectReach
Link down power savings enabled. ActiPHY works by lowering the power for a port when there
is no link. The port is power up for short moment in order to determine if cable is inserted.
Cable length power savings enabled. PerfectReach works by determining the cable length and
lowering the power for ports with short cables.
Controls whether Energy Efficient Ethernet is enabled for this copper port.
EEE
For maximizing power savings, the circuit isn't started the instant transmit data is ready for a
port, but is instead queued until a burst of data is ready to be transmitted. This will give some
traffic latency.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 24 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
It is possible to minimize the latency for specific frames, by mapping the frames to a specific
queue (done with QOS), and then mark the queue as an urgent queue. When an urgent queue
gets data to be transmitted, the circuits will be powered up at once and the latency will be
reduced to the wakeup time.
EEE Urgent
Queues set will activate transmission of frames as soon as data is available. Otherwise the
Queues
queue will postpone transmission until a burst of frames can be transmitted.
Buttons
Click to save changes immediately.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 25 of 328
Transition Networks
2.3.1.9
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Ports
This page displays current port configurations. Ports can also be configured here.
Object
Port
Link
Current Link Speed
Description
This is the logical port number for this row. Note that the top row has an ID of *
which indicates this as a “select all” function.
The current link state is displayed graphically. Green indicates the link is up and red
that it is down.
Provides the current link speed of the port.
Selects any available link speed for the given switch port. Only speeds supported by
the specific port are shown. Possible speeds are:
Disabled - Disables the switch port operation.
Auto - Port auto negotiating speed with the link partner and selects the highest
Configured Link Speed
speed that is compatible with the link partner.
10Mbps HDX - Forces the cu port in 10Mbps half-duplex mode.
10Mbps FDX - Forces the cu port in 10Mbps full duplex mode.
100Mbps HDX - Forces the cu port in 100Mbps half-duplex mode.
100Mbps FDX - Forces the cu port in 100Mbps full duplex mode.
1Gbps FDX - Forces the port in 1Gbps full duplex.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 26 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
When Auto Speed is selected on a port, this section indicates the flow control
capability that is advertised to the link partner.
When a fixed-speed setting is selected, that is what is used. The Current Rx column
Flow Control
indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed, and the Current Tx column
indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted. The Rx and Tx settings
are determined by the result of the last Auto-Negotiation.
Check the configured column to use flow control. This setting is related to the
setting for Configured Link Speed.
Maximum Frame Size
Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port, including FCS.
Configure port transmit collision behavior.
Excessive Collision Mode
Discard: Discard frame after 16 collisions (default).
Restart: Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Click to refresh the page immediately. Any changes made locally will be undone.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 27 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.10 DHCP
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network.
DHCP used by networked computers (clients) to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default
gateway, subnet mask, and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server.
The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique, for example, no IP address is assigned to a second
client while the first client's assignment is valid (its lease has not expired). Therefore, IP address pool
management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator.
Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather
than requiring an administrator to manage the task. This means that a new computer can be added to a
network without the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address.
2.3.1.11 DHCP Server
A DHCP Server is used to allocate network addresses and deliver configuration parameters to dynamically
configured hosts called DHCP client.
2.3.1.12 DHCP Server Mode
This page configures global mode and VLAN mode to enable/disable DHCP server per system and per
VLAN. Click the Add New VLAN Range button to enable VLAN Mode and add a new VLAN range.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 28 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Object
Description
Global Mode
Configure the operation mode per system. Possible modes are:
Mode
Enabled: Enable DHCP server per system.
Disabled: Disable DHCP server per system.
VLAN Mode
Indicate the VLAN range in which DHCP server is enabled or disabled. The first VLAN ID
must be smaller than or equal to the second VLAN ID. BUT, if the VLAN range contains only
one VLAN ID, then you can just enter it into either one of the first and second VLAN ID or
both. On the other hand, if you want to disable existing VLAN range, follow these steps.
VLAN Range
1. Press the Add VLAN Range button to add a new VLAN range.
2. Input the VLAN range that you want to disable.
3. Choose Mode to be Disabled.
4. Press the Save button to apply the change.
You will see that the disabled VLAN range is removed from the DHCP Server mode
configuration page.
Indicate the operation mode per VLAN. Possible modes are:
Mode
Enabled: Enable DHCP server per VLAN.
Disabled: Disable DHCP server pre VLAN.
Buttons
Click to delete the setting.
Click to add a new VLAN range.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 29 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.13 DHCP Server Excluded IP
This page configures excluded IP addresses. DHCP server will not allocate these excluded IP addresses to
DHCP client. Click the Add New IP Range button to add a new IP range.
Object
Description
Define the IP range to be excluded IP addresses. The first excluded IP must be smaller
IP Range
than or equal to the second excluded IP. BUT, if the IP range contains only 1 excluded
IP, then you can just input it to either one of the first and second excluded IPs or both.
Buttons
Click to delete the setting.
Click to add a new excluded IP range.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 30 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.14 DHCP Server Pool
This page manages DHCP pools. According to the DHCP pool, DHCP server will allocate IP address and
deliver configuration parameters to DHCP client.
Object
Name
Description
Configure the pool name that accepts all printable characters, except white space. If you want
to configure the detail settings, you can click the pool name to go into the configuration page.
Display which type the pool is:
Network: the pool defines a pool of IP addresses to service more than one DHCP client.
Type
Host: the pool services for a specific DHCP client identified by client identifier or hardware
address.
If "-" is displayed, it means not defined.
IP
Display network number of the DHCP address pool. If "-" is displayed, it means not defined.
Subnet Mask
Display subnet mask of the DHCP address pool. If "-" is displayed, it means not defined.
Lease Time
Display lease time of the pool.
Buttons
Click to delete the setting.
Click to add a new DHCP pool.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 31 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.15 DHCP Snooping
Configure DHCP Snooping on this page.
Object
Description
Indicates the DHCP snooping mode of operation. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable DHCP snooping mode operation. When DHCP snooping mode
Snooping Mode
operation is enabled, the DHCP request messages will be forwarded to trusted ports
and only allow reply packets from trusted ports.
Disabled: Disable DHCP snooping mode operation.
Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode. Possible port modes are:
Port Mode Configuration
Trusted: Configures the port as trusted source of the DHCP messages.
Untrusted: Configures the port as untrusted source of the DHCP messages.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 32 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.16 DHCP Relay
A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server
when they are not in the same subnet domain. It stores the incoming interface IP address in the GIADDR
field of the DHCP packet. The DHCP server can use the value of GIADDR field to determine the assigned
subnet. For such condition, please make sure the switch configuration of VLAN interface IP address and
PVID (Port VLAN ID) correctly.
Object
Description
Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation.
Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable DHCP relay mode operation. When DHCP relay mode operation is
Relay Mode
enabled, the agent forwards and transfers DHCP messages between the clients and
the server when they are not in the same subnet domain. And the DHCP broadcast
message won't be flooded for security considerations.
Disabled: Disable DHCP relay mode operation.
Relay Server
Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address.
Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation. The option 82 circuit ID
format as "[vlan_id][module_id][port_no]". The first four characters represent the
VLAN ID, the fifth and sixth characters are the module ID (in standalone device it
always equal 0), and the last two characters are the port number. For example,
Relay Information Mode
"00030108" means the DHCP message received from VLAN ID 3, switch ID 1,
port 8, and the option 82 remote ID value is equal to the switch MAC address.
Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable DHCP relay information mode operation. When DHCP relay
information mode operation is enabled, the agent inserts specific information (option
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 33 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
82) into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and removes it from a
DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client. It only works when DHCP relay
operation mode is enabled.
Disabled: Disable DHCP relay information mode operation.
Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy. When DHCP relay information
mode operation is enabled, if the agent receives a DHCP message that already
contains relay agent information it will enforce the policy. The 'Replace' policy is
invalid when relay information mode is disabled. Possible policies are:
Replace: Replace the original relay information when a DHCP message that already
Relay Information Policy
contains it is received.
Keep: Keep the original relay information when a DHCP message that already
contains it is received.
Drop: Drop the package when a DHCP message that already contains relay
information is received.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 34 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.17 Security
2.3.1.18 Switch
2.3.1.19 Users
This page provides an overview of the current users. Currently the only way to login as another user on
the web server is to close and reopen the browser. The default User config is shown below.
You can click the linked default User to edit its parameters, or click the Add New User button to add and
configure one or more new users.
Object
User Name
Description
A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is
1 to 31. The valid user name allows letters, numbers and underscores.
The password of the user. The allowed string length is 0 to 31. Any printable character
Password
33710 Rev. A
including space is accepted.
https://www.transition.com
Page 35 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
The privilege level of the user. The allowed range is 1 to 15. If the privilege level value is 15, it
can access all groups, i.e. that is granted the fully control of the device. But other values need
to refer to each group privilege level. User's privilege should be same or greater than the
Privilege Level
group privilege level to have the access of that group. By default, most groups’ privilege level
5 has the read-only access and privilege level 10 has read-write access. System maintenance
(software upload, factory defaults and etc.) need user privilege level 15. Generally, privilege
level 15 can be used for an administrator account, privilege level 10 for a standard user
account and privilege level 5 for a guest account.
Buttons
Click to add a new user.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the Users.
Delete the current user. This button is not available for new configurations (Add New User).
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 36 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.20 Privilege Level
This page provides an overview of the privilege levels.
Object
Description
The name identifying the privilege group. In most cases, a privilege level group consists of a
single module (e.g. LACP, RSTP or QoS), but a few of them contains more than one. The
following description defines these privilege level groups in details:
Group Name
System: Contact, Name, Location, Timezone, Daylight Saving Time, Log.
Security: Authentication, System Access Management, Port (contains Dot1x port, MAC based
and the MAC Address Limit), ACL, HTTPS, SSH, ARP Inspection, IP source guard.
IP: Everything except 'ping'.
Port: Everything except 'VeriPHY'.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 37 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Diagnostics: 'ping' and 'VeriPHY'.
Maintenance: CLI- System Reboot, System Restore Default, System Password, Configuration
Save, Configuration Load and Firmware Load. Web- Users, Privilege Levels and everything in
Maintenance.
Debug: Only present in CLI.
Every group has an authorization Privilege level for the following sub groups: configuration
Privilege Levels
read-only, configuration/execute read-write, status/statistics read-only, status/statistics
read-write (e.g. for clearing of statistics). User Privilege should be same or greater than the
authorization Privilege level to have the access to that group.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 38 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.21 Auth Method
This page lets you configure how a user is authenticated when they log into the switch via one of the
management client interfaces.
Object
Client
Description
The management client for which the configuration below applies (console, telnet, ssh, http).
Method can be set to one of these values:
no: Authentication is disabled and login is not possible.
local: Use the local user database on the switch for authentication.
radius: Use remote RADIUS server(s) for authentication.
tacacs+: Use remote TACACS+ server(s) for authentication.
Methods
Methods that involve remote servers are timed out if the remote servers are offline.
In this case the next method is tried. Each method is tried from left to right and continues until a
method either approves or rejects a user. If a remote server is used for primary authentication it
is recommended to configure secondary authentication as 'local'.
This will enable the management client to login via the local user database if none of the
configured authentication servers are alive.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 39 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.22 SSH
Configure SSH (Secure Shell) on this page. SSH provides a secure channel over an unsecured network in a
client-server architecture, connecting an SSH client application with an SSH server.
Object
Description
Indicates the SSH mode operation. Possible modes are:
Mode
Enabled: Enable SSH mode operation (default).
Disabled: Disable SSH mode operation.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 40 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.23 HTTPS
Configure HTTPS (secure HTTP) on this page. A message like “The webpage at https://192.168.1.77/ might
be temporarily down or it may have moved permanently to a new web address.” displays.
Your browser session closes and you must log in again at https://192.168.1.77. If a message such as
“Your connection is not private” displays, click the Advanced button, and then select “Proceed to
192.168.1.77 (unsafe)”. You can then log back in using your current User Name and Password.
Object
Description
Sets / shows the HTTPS mode operation. When the current connection is HTTPS, to apply
HTTPS disabled mode operation will automatically redirect web browser to an HTTP
Mode
connection. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable HTTPS mode operation.
Disabled: Disable HTTPS mode operation (default).
Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation. It is only significant if HTTPS mode
"Enabled" is selected. Automatically redirects a web browser to an HTTPS connection
Automatic Redirect
when both HTTPS mode and Automatic Redirect are enabled. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation.
Disabled: Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 41 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.24 Access Management
Configure access management table on this page. The maximum number of entries is 16.
If an application’s type matches any one of the access management entries, it will allow access to the
switch. At least one Allowed Access must be selected for each row. The entry content cannot be
duplicated (two instances can not have the same IP address range assigned).
Object
Description
Indicates the access management mode operation. Possible modes are:
Mode
Enabled: Enable access management mode operation.
Disabled: Disable access management mode operation.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
VLAN ID
Indicates the VLAN ID for the access management entry.
Start IP Address
Indicates the starting IP address for the access management entry.
End IP Address
Indicates the ending IP address for the access management entry.
HTTP/HTTPS
SNMP
TELNET/SSH
33710 Rev. A
Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP/HTTPS interface if the host IP address
matches the IP address range provided in the entry.
Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP interface if the host IP address matches
the IP address range provided in the entry.
Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET/SSH interface if the host IP address
matches the IP address range provided in the entry.
https://www.transition.com
Page 42 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Click to add a new access management entry.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 43 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.25 SNMP
2.3.1.26 SNMP System Configuration
Configure SNMP on this page.
Object
Description
Indicates the SNMP mode operation. Possible modes are:
Mode
Enabled: Enable SNMP mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP mode operation.
Indicates the SNMP supported version. Possible versions are:
SNMP v1: Set SNMP supported version 1.
Version
SNMP v2c: Set SNMP supported version 2c.
SNMP v3: Set SNMP supported version 3.
Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent. The allowed
string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. If SNMP version
Read Community
is SNMPv3, the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table.
It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c
community string. In addition to community string, a particular range of source addresses
can be used to restrict source subnet.
Indicates the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent.
Write Community
The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from
33 to 126.
The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. If SNMP version
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 44 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
is SNMPv3, the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table. It
provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c
community string. In addition to community string, a particular range of source addresses
can be used to restrict source subnet.
Engine ID
Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID. The string must contain an even number (in hexadecimal
format) with number of digits between 10 and 64, but all-zeros and all 'F's are not allowed.
Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 45 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.27 SNMP Trap Configuration
To configure SNMP traps, navigate to the Configuration > Security > Switch > SNMP > Trap menu path and
at the Mode dropdown select Enabled.
Click the Add New Entry button to display the SNMP Trap Configuration page.
Configure SNMP traps on this page. The SNMP trap parameters are described below.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 46 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Object
Description
Global Settings
Indicates the trap mode operation. Possible modes are:
Mode
Enabled: Enable SNMP trap mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap mode operation.
Trap Destination Configurations
Name
Indicates the trap Configuration's name. Indicates the trap destination's name.
Indicates the trap destination mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enable
Enabled: Enable SNMP trap mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap mode operation.
Indicates the SNMP trap supported version. Possible versions are:
SNMPv1: Set SNMP trap supported version 1.
Version
SNMPv2c: Set SNMP trap supported version 2c.
SNMPv3: Set SNMP trap supported version 3.
Indicates the SNMP trap destination address. It allows a valid IP address in dotted
decimal notation ('x.y.z.w'). It also allows a valid hostname. A valid hostname is a string
drawn from the alphabet (A-Za-z), digits (0-9), dot (.), dash (-). Spaces are not allowed,
the first character must be an alpha character, and the first and last characters must not
be a dot or a dash.
Destination Address
Indicates the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records
represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each
field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special syntax that
can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous
zeros; but it can appear only once. It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address.
For example, '::192.1.2.34'.
Destination port
33710 Rev. A
Indicates the SNMP trap destination port. SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this
port, the port range is 1~65535.
https://www.transition.com
Page 47 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
The SNMP Trap Configuration table includes these fields (SNMP v2c on the left, SNMP v3 on the right):
Object
Trap Config Name
Description
Enter a name for the SNMP Trap configuration (optional).
Indicates the SNMP trap mode operation. Possible modes are:
Trap Mode
Enabled: Enable SNMP trap mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap mode operation.
Indicates the SNMP trap supported version. Possible versions are:
SNMP v1: Set SNMP trap supported version 1.
Trap Version
SNMP v2c: Set SNMP trap supported version 2c.
SNMP v3: Set SNMP trap supported version 3.
Trap Community
Indicates the community access string when sending SNMP trap packet. The allowed
string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Indicates the SNMP trap destination address. It allow a valid IP address in dotted
decimal notation ('x.y.z.w').
Trap Destination Address
And it also allow a valid hostname. A valid hostname is a string drawn from the
alphabet (A-Za-z), digits (0-9), dot (.), dash (-). Spaces are not allowed, the first
character must be an alpha character, and the first and last characters must not be a
dot or a dash.
Trap Destination Port
Indicates the SNMP trap destination port. SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via
this port, the port range is 1~65535.
Indicates that the SNMP entity is permitted to generate authentication failure traps.
Trap Authentication
Possible modes are:
Failure
Enabled: Enable SNMP trap authentication failure.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap authentication failure.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 48 of 328
Transition Networks
Trap Link-up and
Link-down
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Indicates the SNMP trap link-up and link-down mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable SNMP trap link-up and link-down mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap link-up and link-down mode operation.
Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation. Possible modes are:
Trap Inform Mode
Enabled: Enable SNMP trap inform mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap inform mode operation.
Trap Inform Timeout
Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout. The allowed range is 0 to 2147.
(seconds)
Trap Inform Retry Times
Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times. The allowed range is 0 to 255.
Indicates the SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation. Possible values
Trap Probe Security
are:
Engine ID
Enabled: Enable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation.
Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID. SNMPv3 sends traps and informs using
USM for authentication and privacy. A unique engine ID for these traps and informs is
Trap Security Engine ID
needed. When "Trap Probe Security Engine ID" is enabled, the ID will be probed
automatically. Otherwise, the ID specified in this field is used. The string must contain
an even number (in hexadecimal format) with number of digits between 10 and 64,
but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed.
Indicates the SNMP trap security name. SNMPv3 traps and informs using USM for
Trap Security Name
authentication and privacy. A unique security name is needed when traps and informs
are enabled.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 49 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
SNMP Trap Events
The SNMP Trap Events table includes these fields:
Object
Description
Enable/disable the Interface group's traps. Possible traps are:
System
Warm Start: Enable/disable Warm Start trap.
Cold Start: Enable/disable Cold Start trap.
Sets the Interface group's traps. Indicates that the SNMP entity is permitted to generate
authentication failure traps. Possible traps are:
Interface
Link Up: Enable/disable Link up trap for none / specific / all switches).
Link Down: Enable/disable Link down trap for none / specific / all switches).
LLDP: Enable/disable LLDP trap for none / specific / all switches).
AAA
Switch
Indicates that the AAA group's traps. Possible traps are: SNMP Authentication Fail :
Enable/disable SNMP trap authentication failure trap.
Indicates that the Switch group's traps. Possible traps are: STP: Enable/disable STP trap.
RMON: Enable/disable RMON trap.
Specific Trap Event Configuration: If you select the ‘specific’ radio button for the SNMP Trap Events
‘Link up’, ‘Link down’, and ‘LLDP’, the port-specific table displays. Configure the events on a per-port basis
as required. Click the Save button when done.
Buttons
Click to add and configure a new SNMP user.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 50 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.28 SNMP Communities
Configure SNMPv3 community table on this page. The entry index key is Community.
Object
Delete
Description
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent. The allowed
Community
string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
The community string will be treated as security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c
community string.
Source IP
Source Mask
Indicates the SNMP access source address. A particular range of source addresses can
be used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask.
Indicates the SNMP access source address mask.
Buttons
Click to add a new community entry.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 51 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.29 SNMP Users
To configure SNMP users, navigate to the Configuration > Security > Switch > SNMP > Users menu path
and click the Add New Entry button. Configure SNMPv3 user table on this page. The entry index keys are
Engine ID and User Name.
Object
Delete
Description
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to. The string
must contain an even number (in hexadecimal format) with number of digits between
10 and 64, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed. The SNMPv3 architecture uses
the User-based Security Model (USM) for message security and the View-based
Engine ID
Access Control Model (VACM) for access control. For the USM entry, the
usmUserEngineID and usmUserName are the entry's keys. In a simple agent,
usmUserEngineID is always that agent's own snmpEngineID value. The value can
also take the value of the snmpEngineID of a remote SNMP engine with which this
user can communicate. In other words, if user engine ID equals system engine ID
then it is local user; otherwise it's remote user.
User Name
A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string
length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
When you create a new entry, check the Modify Password checkbox (required).
Modify Password
When password of entry is going to be changed, this option should also be checked;
otherwise, the password will not be changed.
Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models
Security Level
are:
NoAuth, NoPriv: No authentication and no privacy.
Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and no privacy.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 52 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.
The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists. That means it
must first be ensured that the value is set correctly.
Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible
authentication protocols are:
None: No authentication protocol.
Authentication Protocol
MD5: Indicates that this user uses MD5 (message-digest algorithm) authentication.
SHA: Indicates that this user uses SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) authentication.
The value of security level cannot be modified if the entry already exists. This means
you must first ensure that the value is set correctly.
A string identifying the authentication password phrase. For MD5 authentication
Authentication Password
protocol, the allowed string length is 8 to 32. For SHA authentication protocol, the
allowed string length is 8 to 40. The allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to
126.
Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible privacy
protocols are:
None: No privacy protocol.
Privacy Protocol
DES: Indicate that this user uses DES (Data Encryption Standard) authentication
protocol.
AES: Indicate that this user uses AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) authentication
protocol.
Privacy Password
A string identifying the privacy password phrase. The allowed string length is 8 to 32,
and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Buttons
Click to add a new SNMP user entry.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 53 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.30 SNMP Groups
Configure SNMPv3 group table on this page. The entry index keys are Security Model and Security
Name. From the default page, click the Add New Entry button to add and configure a new SNMP group.
Object
Delete
Description
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Indicates the security model that this entry belongs to. Possible security models are:
v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.
Security Model
v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.
usm: User-based Security Model (USM).
Security Name
Group Name
A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string
length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string
length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Buttons
Click to add a new group entry
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 54 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.31 SNMP Views
Configure SNMPv3 view table on this page. The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree.
Click the Add New Entry button to add and configure a new SNMP View entry.
Object
Delete
View Name
Description
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length
is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to. Possible view types are:
included: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included.
excluded: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded.
View Type
In general, if a view entry's view type is 'excluded', there should be another view entry
existing with view type as 'included' and its OID subtree should overstep the 'excluded' view
entry.
OID Subtree
The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view. The allowed OID length is
1 to 128. The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk (*).
Buttons
Click to add a new SNMP View entry.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 55 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.32 SNMP Access
Configure SNMPv3 Access values on this page. The entry index keys are Group Name, Security Model
and Security Level. Click the Add New Entry button to add and configure a new SNMP Access entry.
Object
Delete
Group Name
Description
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is
1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Valid security models are:
any: Any security model accepted (v1|v2c|usm).
Security Model
v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.
v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.
usm: User-based Security Model (USM).
Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:
NoAuth, NoPriv: No authentication and no privacy.
Security Level
Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and no privacy.
Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.
The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the
Read View Name
current values. The allowed string length is 1 - 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters
33 - 126.
The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially set
Write View Name
new values. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters
from 33 to 126.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 56 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Click to add a new access entry.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 57 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.33 RMON
2.3.1.34 RMON Statistics
Configure RMON Statistics table on this page. The entry index key is ID.
Object
Description
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID
Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Data Source
Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored.
Buttons
Click to add a new community entry.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 58 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.35 RMON History
Configure the RMON History table on this page. The entry index key is ID.
Object
Description
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID
Indicates the index of the entry. The valid range is 1 - 65535.
Data Source
Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored.
Interval
Buckets
Buckets Granted
Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data. The valid range
is 1 - 3600, default value is 1800 seconds.
Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in
RMON. The range is from 1 to 3600; the default value is 50.
The number of data that will be saved in the RMON.
Buttons
Click to add a new community entry.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 59 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.36 RMON Alarm
Configure RMON Alarm table on this page. The entry index key is ID.
Object
Description
Delete
Check to delete the entry during the next save.
ID
Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65.
Interval
Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold.
The range is from 1 to 2^31-1.
Indicates the particular variable to be sampled, the possible variables are:
InOctets: The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
InUcastPkts: The number of uni-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
InNUcastPkts: The number of broad-cast and multi-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer
protocol.
InDiscards: The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal.
InErrors: The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being
deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
Variable
InUnknownProtos: the number of the inbound packets that were discarded because of the
unknown or un-support protocol.
OutOctets: The number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing
characters.
OutUcastPkts: The number of uni-cast packets that request to transmit.
OutNUcastPkts: The number of broad-cast and multi-cast packets that request to transmit.
OutDiscards: The number of outbound packets that are discarded if the packets are normal.
OutErrors: The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.
OutQLen: The length of the output packet queue (in packets).
Sample Type
33710 Rev. A
The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared
against the thresholds, possible sample types are:
https://www.transition.com
Page 60 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Absolute: Get the sample directly.
Delta: Calculate the difference between samples (default).
Value
The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.
The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared
against the thresholds, possible sample types are:
Rising Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold.
Startup Alarm
Falling Trigger alarm when the first value is less than the falling threshold.
RisingOrFalling Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold or less
than the falling threshold (default).
Rising Threshold
Rising threshold value (-2147483648 - 2147483647).
Rising Index
Rising event index (1-65535).
Falling Threshold
Falling threshold value (-2147483648 - 2147483647).
Falling Index
Falling event index (1-65535).
Buttons
Click to add a new community entry.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 61 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.37 RMON Event
Configure RMON Event table on this page. The entry index key is ID.
Object
Description
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID
Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Desc
Indicates this event, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is a null string.
Indicates the notification of the event, the possible types are:
none: No SNMP log is created, no SNMP trap is sent.
Type
log: Create SNMP log entry when the event is triggered.
snmptrap: Send SNMP trap when the event is triggered.
logandtrap: Create SNMP log entry and sent SNMP trap when the event is triggered.
Community
Event Last Time
Specify the community when trap is sent, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is
"public".
Indicates the value of sysUpTime at the time this event entry last generated an event.
Buttons
Click to add a new community entry.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 62 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.38 Network
2.3.1.39 Limit Control
This page lets you configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings. Limit Control allows
for limiting the number of users on a given port. A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID.
If Limit Control is enabled on a port, the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port. If this
number is exceeded, an action is taken. The action can be one of the four actions described below.
The Limit Control module utilizes a lower-layer ( Port Security) module which manages MAC addresses
learned on the port. The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections, a system- and a port-wide.
Object
Description
System Configuration
Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switch. If globally disabled,
Mode
other modules may still use the underlying functionality, but limit checks and corresponding
actions are disabled.
Aging Enabled
33710 Rev. A
If checked, secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period .
https://www.transition.com
Page 63 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
If Aging Enabled is checked, then the aging period is controlled with this input. If other
modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses, they may have
other requirements to the aging period. The underlying port security will use the shorter
requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality.
The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10,000,000 seconds.
To understand why aging may be desired, consider the following scenario: Suppose an
Aging Period
end-host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub, which in turn is connected to a port on
this switch on which Limit Control is enabled. The end-host will be allowed to forward if the
limit is not exceeded. Now suppose that the end-host logs off or powers down. If it wasn't for
aging, the end-host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to
forward. To overcome this situation, enable aging. With aging enabled, a timer is started
once the end-host gets secured. When the timer expires, the switch starts looking for frames
from the end-host, and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period, the end-host
is assumed to be disconnected, and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch.
Port Configuration
Port
The port number to which the configuration below applies.
Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port. Both this and the Global Mode must
Mode
be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect. Note that other modules may still use the
underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port.
The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port. This number
cannot exceed 1024. If the limit is exceeded, the corresponding action is taken.
Limit
The switch is "born" with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw
whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security-enabled port. Since all ports draw
from the same pool, it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted, if the
remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses.
If Limit is reached, the switch can take one of the following actions:
None: Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port, but take no further action.
Trap: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses are seen on the port, send an SNMP trap. If Aging is
disabled, only one SNMP trap will be sent, but with Aging enabled, new SNMP traps will be
Action
sent every time the limit gets exceeded.
Shutdown: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, shut down the port. This implies
that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port, and no new address will be
learned. Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port (by
disconnecting the cable), the port will remain shut down. There are three ways to re-open the
port:
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 64 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
1) Boot the switch,
2) Disable and re-enable Limit Control on the port or the switch,
3) Click the Reopen button.
Trap & Shutdown: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, both the "Trap" and the
"Shutdown" actions described above will be taken.
This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control's point of view.
The state takes one of four values:
Disabled: Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port.
Ready: The limit is not yet reached. This can be shown for all actions.
State
Limit Reached: Indicates that the limit is reached on this port. This state can only be
shown if Action is set to None or Trap.
Shutdown: Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module. This state can
only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap & Shutdown.
If a port is shutdown by this module, you may reopen it by clicking this button, which will only
be enabled if this is the case. For other methods, refer to Shutdown in the Action section.
Re-open Button
Note that clicking the Reopen button causes the page to be refreshed, so non-committed
changes will be lost.
Buttons
Click to refresh the page immediately. Note that non-committed changes will be lost.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 65 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.40 NAS
The Configuration > Security > Network > NAS page lets you configure the IEEE 802.1X and MAC-based
authentication system and port settings.
The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a port-based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized
access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication. One or more central
servers, the backend servers, determine whether the user is allowed access to the network. These
backend (RADIUS) servers are configured on the Configuration > Security > AAA page. The IEEE802.1X
standard defines port-based operation, but non-standard variants overcome security limitations as
described below.
MAC-based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same port, and doesn't
require the user to have special 802.1X supplicant software installed on his system. The switch uses the
user's MAC address to authenticate against the backend server. Intruders can create counterfeit MAC
addresses, which makes MAC-based authentication less secure than 802.1X authentication.
The NAS configuration consists of two sections: a system-wide section and a port-wide section.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 66 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Object
Description
System Configuration
Mode
Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch. If globally disabled, all
ports are allowed forwarding of frames.
If checked, successfully authenticated supplicants/clients are reauthenticated after
the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period. Reauthentication for
802.1X-enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch
Reauthentication Enabled
port or if a supplicant is no longer attached.
For MAC-based ports, reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server
configuration has changed. It does not involve communication between the switch
and the client, and therefore doesn't imply that a client is still present on a port (see
Aging Period below).
Determines the period, in seconds, after which a connected client must be
Reauthentication Period
reauthenticated. This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is
checked. Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds.
Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames.
EAPOL Timeout
Valid values are in the range 1 to 65535 seconds. This has no effect for MAC-based
ports.
This setting applies to the following modes (i.e. modes using the Port Security
functionality to secure MAC addresses):
• Single 802.1X
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-Based Auth.
When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses, the
Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at
regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time.
Aging Period
This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10
and 1000000 seconds.
If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in an 802.1X-based mode, this is not so
critical, since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon
the next reauthentication, which will fail. But if reauthentication is not enabled, the only
way to free resources is by aging the entries.
For ports in MAC-based Auth. mode, reauthentication doesn't cause direct
communication between the switch and the client, so this will not detect whether the
client is still attached or not, and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 67 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
This setting applies to the following modes, i.e. modes using the Port Security
functionality to secure MAC addresses:
• Single 802.1X
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-Based Auth.
If a client is denied access - either because the RADIUS server denies the client
Hold Time
access or because the RADIUS server request times out (according to the timeout
specified on the Configuration > Security > AAA page) - the client is put on hold in
the Unauthorized state. The hold timer does not count during an on-going
authentication.
In MAC-based Auth. mode, the switch will ignore new frames coming from the client
during the hold time.
The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds.
RADIUS-assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which
traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch.
The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take
advantage of this feature (see RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed
RADIUS-Assigned QoS
description).
Enabled
The "RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally
enable/disable RADIUS-server assigned QoS Class functionality. When checked, the
individual ports' ditto setting determines whether RADIUS-assigned QoS Class is
enabled on that port. When unchecked, RADIUS-server assigned QoS Class is
disabled on all ports.
RADIUS-assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a
successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch. Incoming traffic will be
classified to and switched on the RADIUS-assigned VLAN. The RADIUS server must
be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature
RADIUS-Assigned VLAN
(see RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description).
Enabled
The "RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally
enable/disable RADIUS-server assigned VLAN functionality. When checked, the
individual ports' ditto setting determines whether RADIUS-assigned VLAN is enabled
on that port. When unchecked, RADIUS-server assigned VLAN is disabled on all
ports.
Guest VLAN Enabled
33710 Rev. A
A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN - typically with limited network access - on which
802.1X-unaware clients are placed after a network administrator-defined timeout. The
https://www.transition.com
Page 68 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below.
The "Guest VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable/disable
Guest VLAN functionality. When checked, the individual ports' ditto setting determines
whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN. When unchecked, the ability to
move to the Guest VLAN is disabled on all ports.
This is the value that a port's Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest
Guest VLAN ID
VLAN. It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.
Valid values are in the range [1; 4095].
The number of times the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without
Max. Reauth. Count
response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting.
The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.
Valid values are in the range [1; 255].
The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the
life-time of the port. Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN, it
will first check if this option is enabled or disabled. If disabled (unchecked; default),
Allow Guest VLAN if
the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received
EAPOL Seen
on the port for the life-time of the port. If enabled (checked), the switch will consider
entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for
the life-time of the port.
The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.
Port Configuration
Port
The port number for which the configuration below applies.
If NAS is globally enabled, this selection controls the port's authentication mode. The
following modes are available:
Force Authorized: In this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame
when the port link comes up, and any client on the port will be allowed network access
without authentication.
Force Unauthorized: In this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame
Admin State
when the port link comes up, and any client on the port will be disallowed network
access.
Port-based 802.1X: In the 802.1X-world, the user is called the supplicant, the switch
is the authenticator, and the RADIUS server is the authentication server. The
authenticator acts as the man-in-the-middle, forwarding requests and responses
between the supplicant and the authentication server. Frames sent between the
supplicant and the switch are special 802.1X frames, known as EAPOL (EAP Over
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 69 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
LANs) frames. EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs (RFC3748). Frames sent
between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets. RADIUS packets
also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch's IP
address, name, and the supplicant's port number on the switch. EAP is very flexible,
in that it allows for different authentication methods, like MD5-Challenge, PEAP, and
TLS. The important thing is that the authenticator (the switch) doesn't need to know
which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using,
or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method. The
switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type (EAPOL
or RADIUS) and forwards it.
When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a special packet
containing a success or failure indication. Besides forwarding this decision to the
supplicant, the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected
to the supplicant.
Note: Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is
configured to X seconds (using the AAA configuration page), and suppose that the
first server in the list is currently down (but not considered dead). Now, if the
supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds, then it will
never get authenticated, because the switch will cancel on-going backend
authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from
the supplicant. And since the server hasn't yet failed (because the X seconds haven't
expired), the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication
server request from the switch. This scenario will loop forever. Therefore, the server
timeout should be smaller than the supplicant's EAPOL Start frame retransmission
rate.
Single 802.1X: In port-based 802.1X authentication, once a supplicant is successfully
authenticated on a port, the whole port is opened for network traffic. This allows other
clients connected to the port (for instance through a hub) to piggy-back on the
successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really
aren't authenticated. To overcome this security breach, use the Single 802.1X variant.
Single 802.1X is really not an IEEE standard, but features many of the same
characteristics as does port-based 802.1X. In Single 802.1X, at most one supplicant
can get authenticated on the port at a time. Normal EAPOL frames are used in the
communication between the supplicant and the switch. If more than one supplicant is
connected to a port, the one that comes first when the port's link comes up will be the
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 70 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
first one considered. If that supplicant doesn't provide valid credentials within a certain
amount of time, another supplicant will get a chance. Once a supplicant is
successfully authenticated, only that supplicant will be allowed access. This is the
most secure of all the supported modes. In this mode, the Port Security module is
used to secure a supplicant's MAC address once successfully authenticated.
Multi 802.1X: Multi 802.1X is - like Single 802.1X - not an IEEE standard, but a
variant that features many of the same characteristics. In Multi 802.1X, one or more
supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time. Each supplicant
is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security
module.
In Multi 802.1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as
destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the
supplicant, since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to
requests sent from the switch. Instead, the switch uses the supplicant's MAC address,
which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent
by the supplicant. An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached. In this
case, the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast
MAC address as destination - to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port.
The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited
using the Port Security Limit Control functionality.
MAC-based Auth: Unlike port-based 802.1X, MAC-based authentication is not a
standard, but merely a best-practices method adopted by the industry. In MAC-based
authentication, users are called clients, and the switch acts as the supplicant on
behalf of clients. The initial frame (any kind of frame) sent by a client is snooped by
the switch, which in turn uses the client's MAC address as both username and
password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server. The 6-byte MAC
address is converted to a string on the following form "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx", that is, a
dash (-) is used as separator between the lower-cased hexadecimal digits. The switch
only supports the MD5-Challenge authentication method, so the RADIUS server must
be configured accordingly.
When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a success or failure
indication, which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular
client, using the Port Security module. Only then will frames from the client be
forwarded on the switch. There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication,
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 71 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
and therefore, MAC-based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802.1X standard.
The advantage of MAC-based authentication over 802.1X-based authentication is
that the clients don't need special supplicant software to authenticate. The
disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users - equipment
whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone. Also, only the
MD5-Challenge method is supported. The maximum number of clients that can be
attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality.
When RADIUS-Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) on a
given port, the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS
Access-Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is
successfully authenticated. If present and valid, traffic received on the supplicant's
port will be classified to the given QoS Class. If (re-)authentication fails or the RADIUS
Access-Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it's invalid, or the supplicant is
otherwise no longer present on the port, the port's QoS Class is immediately reverted
RADIUS-Assigned QoS
Enabled
to the original QoS Class (which may be changed by the administrator in the
meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS-assigned). This option is only available for
single-client modes (Port-based 802.1X or Single 802.1X).
RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class:
The User-Priority-Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying
the QoS Class in an Access-Accept packet.
Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered, and to be
valid, it must follow this rule:
• All 8 octets in the attribute's value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters
in the range '0' - '7', which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range [0; 7].
When RADIUS-Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) for a
given port, the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS
Access-Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is
successfully authenticated. If present and valid, the port's Port VLAN ID will be
RADIUS-Assigned VLAN
changed to this VLAN ID, the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID, and the
Enabled
port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode. Once assigned, all traffic arriving on the
port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS-assigned VLAN ID.
If (re-)authentication fails or the RADIUS Access-Accept packet no longer carries a
VLAN ID or it's invalid, or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port, the
port's VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID (which may be
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 72 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the
RADIUS-assigned).
This option is only available for single-client modes, either:
• Port-based 802.1X, or
• Single 802.1X
For troubleshooting VLAN assignments, use the Monitor > VLANs > VLAN
Membership and > VLAN Port pages. These pages show which modules have
(temporarily) overridden the current Port VLAN configuration.
RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID:
RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN
ID in an Access-Accept packet. The following criteria are used:
• The Tunnel-Medium-Type, Tunnel-Type, and Tunnel-Private-Group-ID attributes
must all be present at least once in the Access-Accept packet.
• The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value
and fulfil the following requirements (if Tag == 0 is used, the Tunnel-Private-Group-ID
does not need to include a Tag):
- Value of Tunnel-Medium-Type must be set to "IEEE-802" (ordinal 6).
- Value of Tunnel-Type must be set to "VLAN" (ordinal 13).
- Value of Tunnel-Private-Group-ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range '0' '9', which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID. Leading '0's are
discarded. The final value must be in the range [1; 4095].
When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) for a given port,
the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules
outlined below.
This option is only available for EAPOL-based modes, i.e.:
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X
Guest VLAN Enabled
• Multi 802.1X
For trouble-shooting VLAN assignments, use the "Monitor > VLANs > VLAN
Membership and VLAN Port" pages. These pages show which modules have
(temporarily) overridden the current Port VLAN configuration.
Guest VLAN Operation:
When a Guest VLAN enabled port's link comes up, the switch starts transmitting
EAPOL Request Identity frames. If the number of transmissions of such frames
exceeds Max. Reauth. Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 73 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
meanwhile, the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN. The interval between
transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout. If
Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled, the port will now be placed in the Guest
VLAN. If disabled, the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has
previously been received on the port (this history is cleared if the port link goes down
or the port's Admin State is changed), and if not, the port will be placed in the Guest
VLAN. Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN, but continue transmitting
EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout.
Once in the Guest VLAN, the port is considered authenticated, and all attached clients
on the port are allowed access on this VLAN. The switch will not transmit an EAPOL
Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN.
While in the Guest VLAN, the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames, and if one
such frame is received, the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN
and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode. If an EAPOL
frame is received, the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the
"Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen" is disabled.
The current state of the port. It can undertake one of the following values:
Globally Disabled: NAS is globally disabled.
Link Down: NAS is globally enabled, but there is no link on the port.
Authorized: The port is in Force Authorized or a single-supplicant mode and the
Port State
supplicant is authorized.
Unauthorized: The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single-supplicant mode and the
supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server.
X Auth/Y Unauth: The port is in a multi-supplicant mode. Currently X clients are
authorized and Y are unauthorized.
Two buttons are available for each row. The buttons are only enabled when
authentication is globally enabled and the port's Admin State is in an EAPOL-based or
MAC-based mode.
Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect.
Restart
Reauthenticate: Schedules a reauthentication whenever the quiet-period of the port
runs out (EAPOL-based authentication). For MAC-based authentication,
reauthentication will be attempted immediately.
The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will
not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized.
Reinitialize: Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby an
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 74 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
immediate reauthentication. The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while
the reauthentication is in progress.
Buttons
Click to refresh the page immediately. Note that non-committed changes will be lost.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 75 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.41 ACL
2.3.1.42 ACL Port
Configure the ACL parameters (ACE) of each switch port. These parameters will affect frames received on
a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE.
Object
Port
Description
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Select the policy to apply to this port. The allowed values are 0 through 255. The default value
Policy ID
Action
is 0.
Select whether forwarding is permitted ("Permit") or denied ("Deny"). The default value is
"Permit".
Select which rate limiter to apply on this port. The allowed values are Disabled or the values
Rate Limiter ID
33710 Rev. A
1 through 16. The default value is "Disabled".
https://www.transition.com
Page 76 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Select which port frames are redirected on. The allowed values are Disabled or a specific
Port Redirect
port number and it can't be set when action is permitted. The default value is "Disabled".
Specify the mirror operation of this port. The allowed values are:
Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.
Mirror
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.
The default value is "Disabled".
Specify the logging operation of this port. Notice that the logging message doesn't include the
4 bytes CRC. The allowed values are:
Enabled: Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log.
Logging
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not logged.
The default value is "Disabled". Note: The logging feature only works when the packet length
is less than 1518(without VLAN tags) and the System Log memory size and logging rate is
limited.
Specify the port shut down operation of this port. The allowed values are:
Enabled: If a frame is received on the port, the port will be disabled.
Disabled: Port shut down is disabled.
Shutdown
The default value is "Disabled".
Note: The shutdown feature only works when the packet length is less than 1518(without
VLAN tags).
Specify the port state of this port. The allowed values are:
Enabled: To reopen ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module.
State
Disabled: To close ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module.
The default value is "Enabled".
Counter
Counts the number of frames that match this ACE.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Click to refresh the page; any changes made locally will be undone.
Click to clear the counters.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 77 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.43 ACL Rate Limiters
Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the switch.
Object
Description
Rate Limiter ID
The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row.
Rate
The rate range is 0-3276700 in pps, or 0, 100, 200, 300, .. 1000000 in kbps.
Specify the rate unit of measure. The allowed values are:
Unit
pps: packets per second.
kbps: Kbits per second.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 78 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.44 Access Control List
This page shows the Access Control List (ACL), which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch.
Each row describes the ACE that is defined. The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch.
Click on the plus sign (
) to add a new ACE to the list. The reserved ACEs, used for internal protocols,
cannot be edited or deleted; the order sequence cannot be changed, and the priority is highest.
Object
Description
Indicates the ingress port of the ACE. Possible values are:
Ingress Port
All: The ACE will match all ingress port.
Port: The ACE will match a specific ingress port.
Policy / Bitmask
Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE.
Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Possible values are:
Any: The ACE will match any frame type.
EType: The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames. Note that an Ethernet Type based
ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames.
ARP: The ACE will match ARP/RARP frames.
Frame Type
IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.
IPv4/ICMP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.
IPv4/UDP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.
IPv4/TCP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.
IPv4/Other: The ACE will match IPv4 frames, which are not ICMP/UDP/TCP.
IPv6: The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames.
Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.
Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.
Action
Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.
Filter: Frames matching the ACE are filtered.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 79 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 16. When
Rate Limiter
Disabled is displayed, the rate limiter operation is disabled.
Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE. Frames matching the ACE are
Port Redirect
redirected to the port number. The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port
number. When Disabled is displayed, the port redirect operation is disabled.
Specify the mirror operation of this port. Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the
destination mirror port. The allowed values are:
Mirror
Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.
The default value is "Disabled".
Counter
The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.
You can modify each ACE (Access Control Entry) in the table using these buttons:
: Inserts a new ACE before the current row.
: Edits the ACE row.
Modification Buttons
: Moves the ACE up the list.
: Moves the ACE down the list.
: Deletes the ACE.
: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page; any changes made locally will be undone.
Click to clear the counters.
Click to remove all ACEs.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 80 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
The ACE Configuration page includes various fields, depending on the parameters chosen; for example:
Object
Description
Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies.
Ingress Port
All: The ACE applies to all port.
Port n: The ACE applies to this port number, where n is the number of the switch port.
Specify the policy number filter for this ACE.
Any: No policy filter is specified. (policy filter status is "don't-care".)
Policy Filter
Specific: If you want to filter a specific policy with this ACE, choose this value.
Two field for entering a policy value and a policy bitmask display.
Policy Value
When "Specific" is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy value.
The allowed range is 0 to 255.
When "Specific" is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy bitmask.
The allowed range is 0x0 to 0xff. Notice the usage of bitmask, if the binary bit value is
Policy Bitmask
"0", it means this bit is "don't-care". The real matched pattern is [policy_value &
policy_bitmask]. For example, if the policy value is 3 and the policy bitmask is 0x10(bit 0
is "don't-care" bit), then policy 2 and 3 are applied to this rule.
Select the frame type for this ACE. These frame types are mutually exclusive.
Any: Any frame can match this ACE.
Frame Type
Ethernet Type: Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE. The IEEE 802.3
describes the value of Length/Type Field specifications to be greater than or equal to
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 81 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
1536 decimal (equal to 0600 hexadecimal).
ARP: Only ARP frames can match this ACE. Notice the ARP frames won't match the
ACE with ethernet type.
IPv4: Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE. Notice the IPv4 frames won't match the
ACE with ethernet type.
IPv6: Only IPv6 frames can match this ACE. Notice the IPv6 frames won't match the
ACE with Ethernet type.
Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE.
Permit: The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation.
Action
Deny: The frame that hits this ACE is dropped.
Filter: Frames matching the ACE are filtered.
Specify the rate limiter in number of base units. The allowed range is 1 to 16. Disabled
Rate Limiter
indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled.
Frames that hit the ACE are redirected to the port number specified here. The rate
Port Redirect
limiter will affect these ports. The allowed range is the same as the switch port number
range. Disabled indicates that the port redirect operation is disabled and the specific
port number of 'Port Redirect' can't be set when action is permitted.
Specify the mirror operation of this port. Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the
destination mirror port. The rate limiter will not affect frames on the mirror port. The
Mirror
allowed values are:
Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.
The default value is "Disabled".
Specify the logging operation of the ACE. Notice that the logging message doesn't
include the 4 bytes CRC information. The allowed values are:
Enabled: Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log.
Logging
Disabled: Frames matching the ACE are not logged.
Note: The logging feature only works when the packet length is less than 1518(without
VLAN tags) and the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited.
Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:
Enabled: If a frame matches the ACE, the ingress port will be disabled.
Shutdown
Disabled: Port shut down is disabled for the ACE.
Note: The shutdown feature only works when the packet length is less than
1518(without VLAN tags).
Counter
33710 Rev. A
The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.
https://www.transition.com
Page 82 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
MAC Parameters
(Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP.)
Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE.
SMAC Filter
Any: No SMAC filter is specified. (SMAC filter status is "don't-care".)
Specific: If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE, choose
this value. A field for entering an SMAC value appears.
When "Specific" is selected for the SMAC filter, you can enter a specific source MAC
SMAC Value
address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx" or "xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx" or "xxxxxxxxxxxx"
(x is a hexadecimal digit). A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value.
Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE.
Any: No DMAC filter is specified. (DMAC filter status is "don't-care".)
MC: Frame must be multicast.
DMAC Filter
BC: Frame must be broadcast.
UC: Frame must be unicast.
Specific: If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE,
choose this value. A field for entering a DMAC value appears.
DMAC Value
When "Specific" is selected for the DMAC filter, you can enter a specific destination
MAC address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx" or "xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx" or
"xxxxxxxxxxxx" (x is a hexadecimal digit). A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC
value.
VLAN Parameters
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to the 802.1Q tagged. The allowed
values are:
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
802.1Q Tagged
Enabled: Tagged frame only.
Disabled: Untagged frame only.
The default value is "Any".
Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE.
Any: No VLAN ID filter is specified. (VLAN ID filter status is "don't-care".)
VLAN ID Filter
Specific: If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE, choose this value. A
field for entering a VLAN ID number appears.
When "Specific" is selected for the VLAN ID filter, you can enter a specific VLAN ID
VLAN ID
number. The allowed range is 1 to 4095. A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN
ID value.
Tag Priority
33710 Rev. A
Specify the tag priority for this ACE. A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority.
https://www.transition.com
Page 83 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
The allowed number range is 0 to 7 or range 0-1, 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, 0-3 and 4-7. The
value Any means that no tag priority is specified (tag priority is "don't-care".)
ARP Parameters
Specify the available ARP/RARP opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.
Any: No ARP/RARP OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care".)
ARP/RARP
ARP: Frame must have ARP opcode set to ARP.
RARP: Frame must have RARP opcode set to RARP.
Other: Frame has unknown ARP/RARP Opcode flag.
Specify the available Request/Reply opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.
Any: No Request/Reply OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care".)
Request/Reply
Request: Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set.
Reply: Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag.
Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE.
Any: No sender IP filter is specified. (Sender IP filter is "don't-care".)
Host: Sender IP filter is set to Host. Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address
Sender IP Filter
field that appears.
Network: Sender IP filter is set to Network. Specify the sender IP address and sender
IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.
Sender IP Address
When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a specific
sender IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Sender IP Mask
When "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a specific sender IP
mask in dotted decimal notation.
Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE.
Any: No target IP filter is specified. (Target IP filter is "don't-care".)
Host: Target IP filter is set to Host. Specify the target IP address in the Target IP
Target IP Filter
Address field that appears. Network: Target IP filter is set to Network. Specify the target
IP address and target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that
appear.
Target IP Address
Target IP Mask
ARP Sender MAC
Match
33710 Rev. A
When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a specific
target IP address in dotted decimal notation.
When "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a specific target IP
mask in dotted decimal notation.
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address
field (SHA) settings.
0: ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address.
https://www.transition.com
Page 84 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
1: ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware address
RARP Target MAC
Match
field (THA) settings.
0: RARP frames where THA is not equal to the target MAC address.
1: RARP frames where THA is equal to the target MAC address.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP hardware
address length (HLN) and protocol address length (PLN) settings.
0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is not equal to Ethernet (0x06) or the (PLN) is not
IP/Ethernet Length
equal to IPv4 (0x04).
1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet (0x06) and the (PLN) is equal
to IPv4 (0x04).
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP hardware
address space (HRD) settings.
IP
0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is not equal to Ethernet (1).
1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet (1).
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP protocol
address space (PRO) settings.
Ethernet
0: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is not equal to IP (0x800).
1: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP (0x800).
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
IP Parameters
Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE.
Any: No IP protocol filter is specified ("don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE, choose this
value. A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears.
ICMP: Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining ICMP
IP Protocol Filter
parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
UDP: Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining UDP
parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
TCP: Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining TCP
parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 85 of 328
Transition Networks
IP Protocol Value
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
When "Specific" is selected for the IP protocol value, you can enter a specific value. The
allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value.
Specify the Time-to-Live settings for this ACE.
zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must not be able to match
IP TTL
this entry.
non-zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must be able to
match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE. This involves the settings for the More
Fragments (MF) bit and the Fragment Offset (FRAG OFFSET) field for an IPv4 frame.
No: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero
IP Fragment
must not be able to match this entry.
Yes: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero
must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the options flag setting for this ACE.
No: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry.
IP Option
Yes: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the source IP filter for this ACE.
Any: No source IP filter is specified. (Source IP filter is "don't-care".)
Host: Source IP filter is set to Host. Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address
SIP Filter
field that appears.
Network: Source IP filter is set to Network. Specify the source IP address and source
IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.
SIP Address
SIP Mask
When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific SIP
address in dotted decimal notation.
When "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific SIP mask in
dotted decimal notation.
Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE.
Any: No destination IP filter is specified. (Destination IP filter is "don't-care".)
Host: Destination IP filter is set to Host. Specify the destination IP address in the DIP
DIP Filter
Address field that appears.
Network: Destination IP filter is set to Network. Specify the destination IP address and
destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 86 of 328
Transition Networks
DIP Address
DIP Mask
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a specific
DIP address in dotted decimal notation.
When "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a specific DIP
mask in dotted decimal notation.
IPv6 Parameters
Specify the IPv6 next header filter for this ACE.
Any: No IPv6 next header filter is specified ("don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific IPv6 next header filter with this ACE, choose
this value. A field for entering an IPv6 next header filter appears.
ICMP: Select ICMP to filter IPv6 ICMP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining ICMP
Next Header Filter
parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
UDP: Select UDP to filter IPv6 UDP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining UDP
parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
TCP: Select TCP to filter IPv6 TCP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining TCP
parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
When "Specific" is selected for the IPv6 next header value, you can enter a specific
Next Header Value
value. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this IPv6
protocol value.
Specify the source IPv6 filter for this ACE.
Any: No source IPv6 filter is specified. (Source IPv6 filter is "don't-care".)
SIP Filter
Specific: Source IPv6 filter is set to Network. Specify the source IPv6 address and
source IPv6 mask in the SIP Address fields that appear.
SIP address
When "Specific" is selected for the source IPv6 filter, you can enter a specific SIPv6
address. The field only supported last 32 bits for IPv6 address.
When "Specific" is selected for the source IPv6 filter, you can enter a specific SIPv6
mask. The field only supported last 32 bits for IPv6 address. Notice the usage of
SIP BitMask
bitmask, if the binary bit value is "0", it means this bit is "don't-care". The real matched
pattern is [sipv6_address & sipv6_bitmask] (last 32 bits). For example, if the SIPv6
address is 2001::3 and the SIPv6 bitmask is 0xFFFFFFFE(bit 0 is "don't-care" bit), then
SIPv6 address 2001::2 and 2001::3 are applied to this rule.
Specify the hop limit settings for this ACE.
zero: IPv6 frames with a hop limit field greater than zero must not be able to match this
Hop Limit
entry.
non-zero: IPv6 frames with a hop limit field greater than zero must be able to match
this entry.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 87 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
ICMP Parameters
Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE.
Any: No ICMP filter is specified (ICMP filter status is "don't-care").
ICMP Type Filter
Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE, you can enter a
specific ICMP value. A field for entering an ICMP value appears.
ICMP Type Value
When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP filter, you can enter a specific ICMP value. The
allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value.
Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE.
Any: No ICMP code filter is specified (ICMP code filter status is "don't-care").
ICMP Code Filter
Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE, you can enter a
specific ICMP code value. A field for entering an ICMP code value appears.
When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP code filter, you can enter a specific ICMP code
ICMP Code Value
value. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code
value.
TCP/UDP Parameters
Specify the TCP/UDP source filter for this ACE.
Any: No TCP/UDP source filter is specified (TCP/UDP source filter status is
"don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source filter with this ACE, you can
TCP/UDP Source Filter
enter a specific TCP/UDP source value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP source value
appears.
Range: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source range filter with this ACE, you
can enter a specific TCP/UDP source range value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP
source value appears.
When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a specific
TCP/UDP Source No.
TCP/UDP source value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE
matches this TCP/UDP source value.
TCP/UDP Source
Range
When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a specific
TCP/UDP source range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this
ACE matches this TCP/UDP source value.
Specify the TCP/UDP destination filter for this ACE.
TCP/UDP Destination
Any: No TCP/UDP destination filter is specified (TCP/UDP destination filter status is
Filter
"don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP destination filter with this ACE, you
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 88 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
can enter a specific TCP/UDP destination value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP
destination value appears.
Range: If you want to filter a specific range TCP/UDP destination filter with this ACE,
you can enter a specific TCP/UDP destination range value. A field for entering a
TCP/UDP destination value appears.
TCP/UDP Destination
Number
TCP/UDP Destination
Range
When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a specific
TCP/UDP destination value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE
matches this TCP/UDP destination value.
When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a specific
TCP/UDP destination range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits
this ACE matches this TCP/UDP destination value.
Specify the TCP "No more data from sender" (FIN) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry.
TCP FIN
1: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the TCP "Synchronize sequence numbers" (SYN) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry.
TCP SYN
1: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the TCP "Reset the connection" (RST) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry.
TCP RST
1: TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the TCP "Push Function" (PSH) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry.
TCP PSH
1: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the TCP "Acknowledgment field significant" (ACK) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry.
TCP ACK
1: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the TCP "Urgent Pointer field significant" (URG) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry.
TCP URG
1: TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 89 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Ethernet Type Parameters
Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE.
Any: No EtherType filter is specified (EtherType filter status is "don't-care").
EtherType Filter
Specific: If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE, you can enter a
specific EtherType value. A field for entering an EtherType value appears.
When "Specific" is selected for the EtherType filter, you can enter a specific EtherType
Ethernet Type Value
value. The allowed range is 0x600 to 0xFFFF but excluding 0x800(IPv4), 0x806(ARP)
and 0x86DD(IPv6). A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Return to the previous page.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 90 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.45 IP Source Guard
IP Source Guard is a security feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering
traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings. It helps prevent IP
spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host.
2.3.1.46 IP Source Guard Configuration
This page provides IP Source Guard related configuration.
Object
Description
Mode of IP Source Guard
Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard.
Configuration
All configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled.
Port Mode Configuration
Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global Mode and
Port Mode on a given port are enabled, IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port.
Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients that can be learned on given port.
Max Dynamic Clients
This value can be 0, 1, 2 or unlimited. If the port mode is enabled and the value of
max dynamic client is equal to 0, it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that
are matched in static entries on the specific port.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 91 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 92 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.47 IP Source Guard Static Table
This page provides IP Source Guard static table configuration.
Object
Description
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Port
The logical port for the settings.
VLAN ID
The vlan id for the settings.
IP Address
Allowed Source IP address.
MAC address
Allowed Source MAC address.
Buttons
Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 93 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.48 ARP Inspection
ARP Inspection is a security feature. Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices
connected to Layer 2 networks by "poisoning" the ARP caches. This feature is used to block such attacks.
Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through the switch device.
2.3.1.49 Port Configuration
This page provides ARP Inspection related configuration.
Object
Mode of ARP Inspection
Configuration
Description
Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection.
Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global Mode and
Port Mode on a given port are enabled, ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port.
Possible modes are:
Port Mode Configuration
Enabled: Enable ARP Inspection operation.
Disabled: Disable ARP Inspection operation.
If you want to inspect the VLAN configuration, you have to enable the setting of
"Check VLAN". The default setting of "Check VLAN" is disabled. When the setting of
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 94 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
"Check VLAN" is disabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the port setting.
And the setting of "Check VLAN" is enabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer
to the VLAN setting.
Possible setting of "Check VLAN" are:
Enabled: Enable check VLAN operation.
Disabled: Disable check VLAN operation.
Only the Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled, and the setting of
"Check VLAN" is disabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the port setting.
There are four log types and possible types are:
None: Log nothing.
Deny: Log denied entries.
Permit: Log permitted entries.
ALL: Log all entries.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
values.
Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 95 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.50 VLAN Mode Configuration
Each page shows up to 9999 entries from the VLAN table, default being 20, selected through the "entries
per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of
the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table.
The "VLAN" input fields lets you select the starting point in the VLAN Table. Clicking the |<< button will
update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next VLAN Table match. The >> button will use
the next entry of the currently displayed VLAN entry as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is
reached a warning message is shown in the displayed table. Use the Reset button to start over.
Specify ARP Inspection to be enabled on which VLANs. First, you must enable the port setting on the Port
Mode Configuration web page. Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled,
ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port. Second, you can specify which VLAN will be inspected on the
VLAN Mode Configuration web page. The Log Type also can be configured on a per VLAN setting.
Possible Log Types are:
None: Log nothing.
Deny: Log denied entries.
Permit: Log permitted entries.
ALL: Log all entries.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Click to add a new VLAN to the ARP Inspection VLAN table.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 96 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.51 Static ARP Inspection Table
Click the Add New Entry button to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection Table for configuration.
The Static ARP Inspection Table parameters are described below.
Object
Description
Delete
Check to delete the entry during the next save.
Port
The logical port for the settings.
VLAN ID
The VLAN ID (VID) for the settings.
MAC Address
Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets.
IP Address
Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets.
The Static ARP Inspection Table buttons are described below.
Buttons
Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 97 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.52 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table (default 20) selected through
the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the
beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table. The "Start from” port address, "VLAN", "MAC address"
and "IP address" input fields let you select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table. Click
the |<< button to update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP
Inspection Table match. The two input fields will - upon a |<< button click - assume the value of the first
displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address. The >> button will use the
last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the text
"No more entries" displays in the table. Use the Reset button to start over.
Object
Description
Port
Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed.
VLAN ID
VLAN-ID in which the ARP traffic is permitted.
MAC Address
User MAC address of the entry.
IP Address
User IP address of the entry.
Translate to static
Select the checkbox to translate the entry to static entry.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.
Click to save changes.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 98 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table.
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 99 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.53 AAA
2.3.1.54 RADIUS
This page lets you configure up to five RADIUS servers.
Object
Description
Global Configuration
Timeout
Timeout is the number of seconds, in the range 1 to 1000, to wait for a reply from a
RADIUS server before retransmitting the request.
Retransmit is the number of times, in the range 1 to 1000, a RADIUS request is
Retransmit
retransmitted to a server that is not responding. If the server has not responded after the
last retransmit it is considered to be dead.
Deadtime, which can be set to a number between 0 to 1440 minutes, is the period during
which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a
Deadtime
previous request. This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it
has already determined as dead.
Setting the Deadtime to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this feature, but only if
more than one server has been configured.
Key
33710 Rev. A
The secret key - up to 63 characters long - shared between the RADIUS server and the
https://www.transition.com
Page 100 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
switch.
NAS-IP-Address
The IPv4 address to be used as attribute 4 in RADIUS Access-Request packets. If this
(Attribute 4)
field is left blank, the IP address of the outgoing interface is used.
NAS-IPv6-Address
The IPv6 address to be used as attribute 95 in RADIUS Access-Request packets. If this
(Attribute 95)
field is left blank, the IP address of the outgoing interface is used.
NAS-Identifier
(Attribute 32)
The identifier - up to 253 characters long - to be used as attribute 32 in RADIUS
Access-Request packets. If this field is left blank, the NAS-Identifier is not included in the
packet.
Server Configuration
Delete
To delete a RADIUS server entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted during the next
Save.
Hostname
The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS server.
Auth Port
The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for authentication.
Acct Port
The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for accounting.
Timeout
Retransmit
Key
This optional setting overrides the global timeout value. Leaving it blank will use the global
timeout value.
This optional setting overrides the global retransmit value. Leaving it blank will use the
global retransmit value.
This optional setting overrides the global key. Leaving it blank will use the global key.
Buttons
Click to add a new RADIUS server, up to 5 servers are supported.
The button can be used to undo the addition of a new server.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 101 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.55 TACACS+
This page lets you configure up to five TACACS+ servers.
Object
Description
Global Configuration
Timeout
Timeout is the number of seconds, in the range 1 to 1000, to wait for a reply from a
TACACS+ server before it is considered to be dead.
Deadtime, which can be set to a number between 0 to 1440 minutes, is the period during
which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a
Deadtime
previous request. This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it
has already determined as dead.
Setting the Deadtime to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this feature, but only if
more than one server has been configured.
Key
The secret key - up to 63 characters long - shared between the TACACS+ server and the
switch.
Server Configuration
Delete
Check this box to delete a TACACS+ server entry during the next Save.
Hostname
The IP address or hostname of the TACACS+ server.
Port
The TCP port to use on the TACACS+ server for authentication.
Timeout
Key
33710 Rev. A
This optional setting overrides the global timeout value. Leaving it blank uses the global
timeout value.
This optional setting overrides the global key. Leaving it blank will use the global key.
https://www.transition.com
Page 102 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Click to add a new TACACS+ server, up to 5 servers are supported.
The button can be used to undo the addition of the new server.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 103 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.56 Aggregation
2.3.1.57 Static Aggregation
This page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group.
Object
Description
Hash Code Contributors
The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame.
Source MAC Address
Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address, or uncheck to disable.
By default, Source MAC Address is enabled.
The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the
Destination MAC Address
frame. Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address, or uncheck to
disable. By default, Destination MAC Address is disabled.
The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check to
IP Address
enable the use of the IP Address, or uncheck to disable. By default, IP Address is
enabled.
The TCP/UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame.
TCP/UDP Port Number
Check to enable the use of the TCP/UDP Port Number, or uncheck to disable.
By default, TCP/UDP Port Number is enabled.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 104 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Aggregation Group Configuration
Group ID
Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row. Group ID "Normal"
indicates there is no aggregation. Only one group ID is valid per port.
Each switch port is listed for each group ID. Select a radio button to include a port in
Port Members
an aggregation, or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation. By
default, no ports belong to any aggregation group. Only full duplex ports can join an
aggregation and ports must be in the same speed in each group.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Note: Static aggregation and LACP cannot both be enabled on the same ports at the same time.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 105 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.58 LACP Aggregation
This page lets you view and configure the current LACP port configuration parameters.
Note: Static aggregation and LACP cannot both be enabled on the same ports at the same time.
Object
Port
LACP Enabled
Description
The switch port number.
Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port. LACP will form an aggregation when 2
or more ports are connected to the same partner.
The Key value incurred by the port, range 1-65535. The Auto setting will set the key as
appropriate by the physical link speed, 10Mb = 1, 100Mb = 2, 1Gb = 3. Using the Specific
Key
setting, a user-defined value can be entered. Ports with the same Key value can participate in
the same aggregation group, while ports with different keys cannot.
The Role shows the LACP activity status. The Active will transmit LACP packets each
Role
second, while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner (speak if spoken to).
The Timeout controls the period between BPDU transmissions. Fast will transmit LACP
Timeout
packets each second, while Slow will wait for 30 seconds before sending a LACP packet.
The Prio controls the priority of the port. If the LACP partner wants to form a larger group than
Prio
is supported by this device then this parameter will control which ports will be active and which
ports will be in a backup role. Lower number means greater priority.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 106 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 107 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.59 Loop Protection
This page lets you view or configure the current Loop Protection Configuration settings.
Object
Description
General Settings
Enable Loop Protection
Transmission Time
Controls whether loop protections is enabled (as a whole).
The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port; valid values are 1 to
10 seconds.
The period (in seconds) for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a loop is
Shutdown Time
detected (and the port action shuts down the port). Valid values are 0 to 604800
seconds (7 days). A value of zero will keep a port disabled (until next device restart).
Port Configuration
Port
The switch port number of the port.
Enable
Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port.
Action
33710 Rev. A
Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port. Valid values are
Shutdown Port, Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only.
https://www.transition.com
Page 108 of 328
Transition Networks
Tx Mode
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU's, or whether it is
just passively looking for looped PDU's.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 109 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.60 Spanning Tree
2.3.1.61 Bridge Settings
This page lets you configure the STP system settings that are used by all STP Bridge instances in the switch.
Object
Description
Basic Settings
The MSTP / RSTP / STP protocol version setting. Valid values are STP, RSTP and
Protocol Version
MSTP.
Controls the bridge priority. Lower numeric values have better priority. The bridge
priority plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of
Bridge Priority
the switch forms a Bridge Identifier.
For MSTP operation, this is the priority of the CIST. Otherwise, this is the priority of the
STP/RSTP bridge
Forward Delay
Max Age
Maximum Hop Count
33710 Rev. A
The delay used by STP Bridges to transit Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding
(used in STP compatible mode). Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds.
The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root
Bridge. Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds
This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the
boundary of an MSTI region. It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute
https://www.transition.com
Page 110 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
its BPDU information to. Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops.
The number of BPDU's a bridge port can send per second. When exceeded,
transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed. Valid values are in the range 1 to 10
Transmit Hold Count
BPDU's per second.
Advanced Settings
Edge Port BPDU Filtering
Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs.
Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception
Edge Port BPDU Guard
of a BPDU. The port will enter the error-disabled state, and will be removed from the
active topology.
Control whether a port in the error-disabled state automatically will be enabled after a
Port Error Recovery
certain time. If recovery is not enabled, ports have to be disabled and re-enabled for
normal STP operation. The condition is also cleared by a system reboot.
Port Error Recovery
The time to pass before a port in the error-disabled state can be enabled. Valid values
Timeout
are between 30 and 86400 seconds (24 hours).
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Messages
Message: STP Error
STP port configuration error. (notes: Before you enable STP ports, please disable all
of Ring groups first.)
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 111 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.62 MSTI Mapping
This page lets you view and configure current STP MSTI bridge instance priority settings.
Object
Description
Configuration Identification
The name identifying the VLAN to MSTI mapping. Bridges must share the name and
Configuration Name
revision (see below), as well as the VLAN-to-MSTI mapping configuration in order to
share spanning trees for MSTI's (Intra-region). The name can be up to 32 characters.
Configuration Revision
The revision of the MSTI configuration named above. This must be 0 - 65535.
MSTI Mapping
MSTI
The bridge instance. The CIST is not available for explicit mapping, as it will receive the
VLANs not explicitly mapped.
The list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI. The VLANs can be given as a single VLAN
VLANs Mapped
(1 - 4094), or a VLAN range, each of which must be separated with comma and/or
space. A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI. An unused MSTI must be left empty
(i.e., not having any VLANs mapped to it). Foe example: 2,5,20-40.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 112 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 113 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.63 MSTI Priorities
This page lets you view and configure current STP MSTI bridge instance priority settings.
Object
MSTI
Description
The bridge instance. The CIST is the default instance, which is always active.
Controls the bridge priority. Lower numeric values have better priority. The bridge priority plus
Priority
the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch forms a
Bridge Identifier.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 114 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.64 CIST Ports
This page lets you view and configure the current STP CIST port configuration settings. This page contains
settings for physical ports and aggregated ports.
Object
Description
Port
The switch port number of the logical STP port.
STP Enabled
Controls whether STP is enabled on this switch port.
Controls the path cost incurred by the port. The Auto setting will set the path cost as
appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended values. Using the
Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. The path cost is used when
Path Cost
establishing the active topology of the network. Lower path cost ports are chosen as
forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports. Valid values are in the range 1 to
200000000.
Priority
Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port
cost. (See above).
Operational flag describing whether the port is connecting directly to edge devices (No
operEdge (state flag)
Bridges attached). Transition to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports (having
operEdge true) than for other ports. The value of this flag is based on AdminEdge and
AutoEdge fields. This flag is displayed as Edge in Monitor > Spanning Tree > STP >
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 115 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Detailed Bridge Status.
AdminEdge
AutoEdge
Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as set or cleared. (The initial operEdge
state when a port is initialized).
Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port.
This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU's are received on the port or not.
If enabled, causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI, even if
it has the best spanning tree priority vector. Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port
Restricted Role
after the Root Port has been selected. If set, it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity.
It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the
network influence the spanning tree active topology, possibly because those bridges are not
under the full control of the administrator. This feature is also known as Root Guard.
If enabled, causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and
topology changes to other ports. If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after
changes in a spanning tree's active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned
Restricted TCN
station location information. It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external
to a core region of the network, causing address flushing in that region, possibly because
those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of
the attached LANs transits frequently.
If enabled, causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU's. Contrary to the
similar bridge setting, the port Edge status does not effect this setting.
BPDU Guard
A port entering error-disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error
Recovery setting as well.
Controls whether the port connects to a point-to-point LAN rather than to a shared medium.
Point-to-Point
This can be automatically determined, or forced either true or false.
Transition to the forwarding state is faster for point-to-point LANs than for shared media.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 116 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.65 MSTI Ports
This page lets you view and modify the current STP MSTI port configurations.
A MSTI port is a virtual port, which is instantiated separately for each active CIST (physical) port for each
MSTI instance configured on and applicable to the port. The MSTI instance must be selected before
displaying actual MSTI port configuration options.
This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports.
At the dropdown select an MSTI port. Click
33710 Rev. A
to get the selected MSTI settings; the page displays:
https://www.transition.com
Page 117 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Object
Port
Description
The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST (and MSTI) port.
Controls the path cost incurred by the port. The Auto setting will set the path cost as
appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended values. Using the
Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. The path cost is used when
Path Cost
establishing the active topology of the network. Lower path cost ports are chosen as
forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports. Valid values are in the range 1 to
200000000.
Priority
Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port
cost. (See above).
Buttons
Click to retrieve settings for a specific MSTI.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 118 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.66 IPMC Profile
2.3.1.67 Profile Table
This page provides IPMC Profile related configurations. The IPMC profile is used to deploy the access
control on IP multicast streams. It is allowed to create at maximum 64 Profiles with at maximum 128
corresponding rules for each.
Object
Global Profile Mode
Delete
Description
Enable/Disable the Global IPMC Profile. The Switch starts to do filtering based on profile
settings only when the global profile mode is enabled.
Check to delete the entry. The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.
The name used for indexing the profile table.
Profile Name
Each entry has the unique name which is composed of at maximum 16 alphabetic and
numeric characters. At least one alphabet must be present.
Additional description, which is composed of at maximum 64 alphabetic and numeric
Profile Description
characters, about the profile.
No blank or space characters are permitted as part of description. Use "_" or "-" to
separate the description sentence.
When the profile is created, click the edit button to enter the rule setting page of the
designated profile. Summary about the designated profile will be shown by clicking the
Rule
view button. You can manage or inspect the rules of the designated profile by using the
following buttons:
: Navigate Profile Rules; list the rules associated with the designated profile.
: Edit Profile Rule; adjust the rules associated with the designated profile.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 119 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Click to add new IPMC profile. Specify the name and configure the new entry.
Click "Save".
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
The IPMC Profile Rule Settings for [Rule-1]:
Navigation Icons:
: Insert a new Rule before this Rule.
: Delete this Rule.
: Move this Rule up.
: Move this Rule down.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 120 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.68 Address Entry
This page provides address range settings used in IPMC profile. The address entry is used to specify the address
range that will be associated with IPMC Profile. You can create up to 128 address entries in the system.
Object
Delete
Description
Check to delete the entry during the next save.
The name used for indexing the address entry table. Each entry has the unique name which
Entry Name
is composed of at maximum 16 alphabetic and numeric characters. At least one alphabet
must be present.
Start Address
The starting IPv4/IPv6 Multicast Group Address that will be used as an address range.
End Address
The ending IPv4/IPv6 Multicast Group Address that will be used as an address range.
Buttons
Click to add a new address range. Specify the name and addresses.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.
Updates the table starting from the first entry in the IPMC Profile Address
Configuration.
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 121 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.69 MVR
This page provides MVR related configuration. Most of the settings are global, whereas the Immediate Leave
and MVR Port-Role configuration is related to the current selecting stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLANs.
In a multicast television application, a PC or a network television or a set-top box can receive the multicast
stream. Multiple set-top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port, which is a switch port
configured as an MVR receiver port. When a subscriber selects a channel, the set-top box or PC sends an
IGMP/MLD report message to Switch A to join the appropriate multicast group address. Uplink ports that send
and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports.
It is allowed to create at maximum four MVR VLANs with corresponding channel profile for each Multicast
VLAN. The channel profile is defined by the IPMC Profile which provides the filtering conditions.
Object
Description
Enable/Disable the Global MVR. The Unregistered Flooding control depends on the current
MVR Mode
configuration in IGMP/MLD Snooping. It is suggested to enable Unregistered Flooding
control when the MVR group table is full.
Delete
33710 Rev. A
Check to delete the entry. The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.
https://www.transition.com
Page 122 of 328
Transition Networks
MVR VID
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Specify the Multicast VLAN ID. Caution: MVR source ports are not recommended to be
overlapped with management VLAN ports.
MVR Name is an optional attribute to indicate the name of the specific MVR VLAN. Maximum
length of the MVR VLAN Name string is 16. MVR VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or
MVR Name
numbers. When the optional MVR VLAN name is given, it should contain at least one
alphabet. MVR VLAN name can be edited for the existing MVR VLAN entries or it can be
added to the new entries.
Define the IPv4 address as source address used in IP header for IGMP control frames.
The default IGMP address is not set (0.0.0.0).
When the IGMP address is not set, system uses IPv4 management address of the IP
IGMP Address
interface associated with this VLAN.
When the IPv4 management address is not set, system uses the first available IPv4
management address.
Otherwise, system uses a pre-defined value. By default, this value will be 192.0.2.1.
Specify the MVR mode of operation. In Dynamic mode, MVR allows dynamic MVR
Mode
membership reports on source ports. In Compatible mode, MVR membership reports are
forbidden on source ports. The default is Dynamic mode.
Tagging
Priority
Specify whether the traversed IGMP/MLD control frames will be sent as Untagged or Tagged
with MVR VID. The default is Tagged.
Specify how the traversed IGMP/MLD control frames will be sent in prioritized manner. The
default Priority is 0.
Define the maximum time to wait for IGMP/MLD report memberships on a receiver port
LLQI
before removing the port from multicast group membership. The value is in units of tenths of
a second. The range is from 0 to 31744. The default LLQI is 5 tenths or one-half second.
When the MVR VLAN is created, select the IPMC Profile as the channel filtering condition for
Interface Channel Profile
the specific MVR VLAN. Summary about the Interface Channel Profiling (of the MVR VLAN)
will be shown by clicking the view button. Profile selected for designated interface channel is
not allowed to have overlapped permit group address.
Profile Management
Button
Port
You can inspect the rules of the designated profile by using the following button:
: Click to list the rules associated with the designated profile.
The logical port for the settings.
Configure an MVR port of the designated MVR VLAN as one of the following roles.
Port Role
Inactive: The designated port does not participate MVR operations.
Source: Configure uplink ports that receive and send multicast data as source ports.
Subscribers cannot be directly connected to source ports.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 123 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Receiver: Configure a port as a receiver port if it is a subscriber port and should only receive
multicast data. It does not receive data unless it becomes a member of the multicast group
by issuing IGMP/MLD messages.
Caution: MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with management
VLAN ports.
Select the port role by clicking the Role symbol to switch the setting.
I indicates Inactive; S indicates Source; R indicates Receiver.
The default Role is Inactive (I).
Immediate Leave
Enable the fast leave on the port.
Buttons
Click to add new MVR VLAN. Specify the VID and configure the new entry. Click "Save".
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 124 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.70 IPMC
IPMC (IP MultiCast) supports IPv4 and IPv6 multicasting. IPMCv4 denotes multicast for IPv4. IPMCv6 denotes
multicast for IPv6. An IPMC Profile is used to deploy the access control on IP multicast streams.
2.3.1.71 IGMP Snooping
IGMP ( Internet Group Management Protocol) is a communications protocol used to manage the membership
of Internet Protocol multicast groups. IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
multicast group memberships. It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification, like ICMP for unicast
connections. IGMP can be used for online video and gaming, and allows more efficient use of resources when
supporting these uses.
2.3.1.72 Basic Configuration
This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration.
Object
Description
Snooping Enabled
Enable the Global IGMP Snooping.
Unregistered IPMCv4
Enable unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding.
Flooding Enabled
The flooding control takes effect only when IGMP Snooping is enabled.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 125 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
When IGMP Snooping is disabled, unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding is always active in
spite of this setting.
IGMP SSM Range
Leave Proxy Enabled
Proxy Enabled
SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) Range allows the SSM-aware hosts and routers run the
SSM service model for the groups in the address range.
Enable IGMP Leave Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave
messages to the router side.
Enable IGMP Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and
leave messages to the router side.
Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that
Router Port
leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier.
If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port, the whole aggregation will act as
a router port.
Enable the fast leave on the port. Multicast snooping Fast Leave processing allows the
switch to remove an interface from the forwarding-table entry without first sending out group
Fast Leave
specific queries to the interface. The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for
the multicast group specified in the original leave message. Fast-leave processing ensures
optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network, even when multiple
multicast groups are in use simultaneously. This processing applies to IGMP and MLD.
Throttling
Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 126 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.73 VLAN Configuration
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table, default being 20, selected through the "entries
per page" input field. When first visited, the Web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of
the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table.
The "VLAN" input fields lets you select the starting point in the VLAN Table.
Object
Description
Delete
Check to delete the entry. The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.
VLAN ID
The VLAN ID of the entry.
IGMP Snooping
Enable the per-VLAN IGMP Snooping. Up to 32 VLANs can be selected for IGMP
Enabled
Snooping.
Querier Election
Enable to join IGMP Querier election in the VLAN. Disable to act as an IGMP
Non-Querier.
Define the IPv4 address as source address used in IP header for IGMP Querier election.
When the Querier address is not set, system uses IPv4 management address of the IP
Querier Address
interface associated with this VLAN.
When the IPv4 management address is not set, the switch uses the first available IPv4
management address. Otherwise, the switch uses a pre-defined value. By default, this
value will be 192.0.2.1.
Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on
Compatibility
the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network.
The allowed selection is IGMP-Auto, Forced IGMPv1, Forced IGMPv2, Forced
IGMPv3, default compatibility value is IGMP-Auto.
PRI
33710 Rev. A
Priority of Interface. It indicates the IGMP control frame priority level generated by the
system. These values can be used to prioritize different classes of traffic.
https://www.transition.com
Page 127 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
The allowed range is 0 (best effort) to 7 (highest), default interface priority value is 0.
RV
QI
Robustness Variable. The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet
loss on a network. The allowed range is 1 to 255, default robustness variable value is 2.
Query Interval. The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the
Querier. The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds, default query interval is 125 seconds.
Query Response Interval. The Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the
QRI
Maximum Response Code inserted into the periodic General Queries.
The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of a second, default query response interval is
100 in tenths of seconds (10 seconds).
Last Member Query Interval. The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented
LLQI (LMQI for IGMP)
by the Last Member Query Interval, multiplied by the Last Member Query Count.
The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of a second; default last member query interval
is 10 in tenths of a second (1 second).
Unsolicited Report Interval. The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between
URI
repetitions of a host's initial report of membership in a group. The allowed range is 0 to
31744 seconds, default unsolicited report interval is 1 second.
Buttons
Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "VLAN" input fields.
Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table, i.e. the entry with
the lowest VLAN ID.
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
Click to add new IGMP VLAN. Specify the VID and configure the new entry. Click
"Save". The specific IGMP VLAN starts working after the corresponding static
VLAN is also created.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 128 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.74 Port Filtering Profile
This page lets you configure the IGMP Snooping Port Filtering Profile. The IP MultiCast Profile is used to
deploy the access control on IP multicast streams.
Object
Port
Filtering Profile
Description
The logical port for the settings.
Select the IPMC Profile as the filtering condition for the specific port. A Summary of
the designated profile will be shown by clicking the view button.
Profile Management
You can inspect the rules of the designated profile by using the
Button
button to List
the rules associated with the designated profile.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 129 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.75 MLD Snooping
MLD (Multicast Listener Discovery for IPv6) is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly
attached link, much as IGMP is used in IPv4. The protocol is embedded in ICMPv6 instead of using a separate
protocol.
2.3.1.76 Basic Configuration
This page provides MLD Snooping related configuration.
Object
Snooping Enabled
Description
Enable the Global MLD Snooping.
Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding.
Unregistered IPMCv6
The flooding control takes effect only when MLD Snooping is enabled.
Flooding Enabled
When MLD Snooping is disabled, unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding is always active
in spite of this setting.
MLD SSM Range
Leave Proxy Enabled
Proxy Enabled
33710 Rev. A
SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) Range allows the SSM-aware hosts and routers run
the SSM service model for the groups in the address range.
Enable MLD Leave Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary
leave messages to the router side.
Enable MLD Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and
leave messages to the router side.
https://www.transition.com
Page 130 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that
Router Port
leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier.
If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port, the whole aggregation will act
as a router port.
Fast Leave
Enable the fast leave on the port.
Throttling
Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 131 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.77 VLAN Configuration
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table, default being 20, selected through the "entries
per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of
the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table.
The "VLAN" input fields lets you select the starting point in the VLAN Table.
Object
Description
Delete
Check to delete the entry. The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.
VLAN ID
The VLAN ID (VID) of the entry.
MLD Snooping Enabled
Querier Election
Enable the per-VLAN MLD Snooping. Up to 32 VLANs can be selected for MLD
Snooping.
Enable to join MLD Querier election in the VLAN. Disable to act as a MLD Non-Querier.
Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending
Compatibility
on the versions of MLD operating on hosts and routers within a network.
The allowed selections are MLD-Auto, Forced MLDv1, and Forced MLDv2.
The default compatibility value is MLD-Auto.
Priority of Interface. It indicates the MLD control frame priority level generated by the
PRI
system. These values can be used to prioritize different classes of traffic.
The allowed range is 0 (best effort) to 7 (highest), default interface priority value is 0.
RV
Robustness Variable. The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet
loss on a link. The allowed range is 1 to 255, default robustness variable value is 2.
Query Interval. The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the
QI
Querier. The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds; the default query interval is 125
seconds.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 132 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Query Response Interval. The Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the
QRI
Maximum Response Code inserted into the periodic General Queries.
The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of a second, default query response interval
is 100 in tenths of seconds (10 seconds).
Last Listener Query Interval. The Last Listener Query Interval is the Maximum
Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast
Address Specific Queries sent in response to Version 1 Multicast Listener Done
LLQI
messages. It is also the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum
Response Code inserted into Multicast Address and Source Specific Query messages.
The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of a second, default last listener query interval
is 10 in tenths of seconds (1 second).
Unsolicited Report Interval. The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between
URI
repetitions of a node's initial report of interest in a multicast address.
The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds, default unsolicited report interval is 1 second.
Buttons
Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "VLAN" input fields.
Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table, i.e. the entry with the
lowest VLAN ID.
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
Click to add new MLD VLAN. Specify the VID and configure the new entry. Click
"Save". The specific MLD VLAN starts working after the corresponding static VLAN is
also created.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 133 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.78 Port Filtering Profile
Object
Port
Filtering Profile
Description
The logical port for the settings.
Select the IPMC Profile as the filtering condition for the specific port. Summary about
the designated profile will be shown by clicking the view button.
Profile Management
You can inspect the rules of the designated profile by using the
Button
button to List
the rules associated with the designated profile.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 134 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.79 LLDP
LLDP is an IEEE 802.1ab standard protocol. The Link Layer Discovery Protocol(LLDP) specified in this standard
allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise, to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN,
the major capabilities provided by the system incorporating that station, the management address or addresses
of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities, and the identification of the stations
point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities. The information
distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information Base (MIB),
making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System (NMS) using a
management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
2.3.1.80 LLDP
This page lets you view and configure the current LLDP port settings.
Object
Description
LLDP Parameters
Tx Interval
33710 Rev. A
The switch periodically transmits LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network
discovery information up-to-date. The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the
https://www.transition.com
Page 135 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Tx Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 5 - 32768 seconds.
Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame
Tx Hold
should be considered valid. The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by
Tx Interval seconds. Valid values are restricted to 2 - 10 times.
If some configuration is changed (e.g. the IP address) a new LLDP frame is transmitted, but the
Tx Delay
time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds. Tx Delay
cannot be larger than 1/4 of the Tx Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 8192
seconds.
When a port is disabled, LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted, an LLDP shutdown frame
Tx Reinit
is transmitted to the neighboring units, signalling that the LLDP information isn't valid anymore.
Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP
initialization. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 10 seconds.
LLDP Port Parameters
Port
The switch port number of the logical LLDP port.
Select LLDP mode.
Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information, but LLDP information from neighbor
units is analyzed.
Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors, but will send out
Mode
LLDP information.
Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information, and will drop LLDP information
received from neighbors.
Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information, and will analyze LLDP information
received from neighbors.
Select CDP awareness. The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames
(The switch doesn't transmit CDP frames). CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is
enabled. Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbors'
table are decoded. All other TLVs are discarded (Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP
frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics.). CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbors'
CDP aware
table as shown below.
CDP TLV "Device ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Chassis ID" field.
CDP TLV "Address" is mapped to the LLDP "Management Address" field. The CDP address
TLV can contain multiple addresses, but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbors
table.
CDP TLV "Port ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Port ID" field.
CDP TLV "Version and Platform" is mapped to the LLDP "System Description" field.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 136 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Both the CDP and LLDP support "system capabilities", but the CDP capabilities cover
capabilities that are not part of the LLDP. These capabilities are shown as "others" in the LLDP
neighbors' table.
If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from
neighbor devices. If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are
terminated by the switch.
Note: When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn't removed
immediately, but gets removed when the hold time is exceeded.
Port Descr
Optional TLV: When checked the "port description" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
Sys Name
Optional TLV: When checked the "system name" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
Sys Descr
Sys Capa
Mgmt Addr
Optional TLV: When checked the "system description" is included in LLDP information
transmitted.
Optional TLV: When checked the "system capability" is included in LLDP information
transmitted.
Optional TLV: When checked the "management address" is included in LLDP information
transmitted.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 137 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.81 LLDP-MED
This page lets you configure the LLDP-MED (Link Level Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint Discovery).
This function applies to VoIP devices which support LLDP-MED.
Object
Description
Fast Start Repeat Count
Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of
endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general. In addition, it is
best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to
particular endpoint types (for example only advertise the voice network policy to
permitted voice-capable devices), both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space
Fast Start Repeat Count
and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate
knowledge of the network policy.
With this in mind LLDP-MED defines an LLDP-MED Fast Start interaction between the
protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol, in order to achieve these
related properties. Initially, a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs
in an LLDPDU. Only after an LLDP-MED Endpoint Device is detected, will an
LLDP-MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP-MED TLVs in
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 138 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port. The LLDP-MED application will temporarily
speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second, when a new
LLDP-MED neighbor has been detected in order share LLDP-MED information as fast
as possible to new neighbors.
Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between
neighbors, it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to
increase the possibility of the neighbors receiving the LLDP frame. With Fast start
repeat count it is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission
would be repeated. The recommended value is 4 times, given that 4 LLDP frames with a
1 second interval will be transmitted, when an LLDP frame with new information is
received.
Note that LLDP-MED and the LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run
on links between LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices, and
as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements, including Network
Connectivity Devices, or other types of links.
Coordinates Location
Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0-90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits.
Latitude
It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the
equator.
Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0-180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits.
Longitude
It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the
prime meridian.
Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within -32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits.
It is possible to select between two altitude types (floors or meters).
Meters: Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified.
Altitude
Floors: Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different
floor-to-floor dimensions. An altitude = 0.0 is meaningful even outside a building, and
represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude. Inside a building, 0.0
represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance.
Map Datum
33710 Rev. A
The Map Datum is used for the coordinates given in these options:
https://www.transition.com
Page 139 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
WGS84: (Geographical 3D) - World Geodesic System 1984, CRS Code 4327, Prime
Meridian Name: Greenwich.
NAD83/NAVD88: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian
Name: Greenwich; The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum
of 1988 (NAVD88). This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land,
not near tidal water (which would use Datum = NAD83/MLLW).
NAD83/MLLW: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian Name:
Greenwich; The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water (MLLW). This
datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water/sea/ocean.
Civic Address Location
Country code
The two-letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters - Example: DK, DE or US.
State
National subdivisions (state, canton, region, province, prefecture).
County
County, parish, gun (Japan), district.
City
City, township, shi (Japan) - Example: Copenhagen.
City district
City division, borough, city district, ward, chou (Japan).
Block (Neighborhood)
Neighborhood, block.
Street
Street - Example: Poppelvej.
Leading street direction
Leading street direction - Example: N.
Trailing street suffix
Trailing street suffix - Example: SW.
Street suffix
Street suffix - Example: Ave, Platz.
House no.
House number - Example: 21.
House no. suffix
House number suffix - Example: A, 1/2.
Landmark
Landmark or vanity address - Example: Columbia University.
Additional location info
Additional location info - Example: South Wing.
Name
Name (residence and office occupant) - Example: Flemming Jahn.
Zip code
Postal/zip code - Example: 2791.
Building
Building (structure) - Example: Low Library.
Apartment
Unit (Apartment, suite) - Example: Apt 42.
Floor
Floor - Example: 4.
Room no.
Room number - Example: 450F.
Place type
Place type - Example: Office.
Postal community name
Postal community name - Example: Leonia.
P.O. Box
Post office box (P.O. BOX) - Example: 12345.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 140 of 328
Transition Networks
Additional code
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Additional code - Example: 1320300003.
Emergency Call Service
Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN
Emergency Call Service
identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN
trunk-based PSAP. This format consists of a numerical digit string, corresponding to the
ELIN to be used for emergency calling.
Policies
Delete
Policy ID
Check to delete the policy. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID for the policy. This is auto generated and will be used when selecting the policies that
will be mapped to the specific ports.
Intended use of the application types:
1. Voice - for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances
supporting interactive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a
separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data
applications.
2. Voice Signalling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a different
policy for the voice signalling than for the voice media. This application type should not
be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice
application policy.
3. Guest Voice - support a separate 'limited feature-set' voice service for guest users
Application Type
and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances
supporting interactive voice services.
4. Guest Voice Signalling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a
different policy for the guest voice signalling than for the guest voice media. This
application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those
advertised in the Guest Voice application policy.
5. Softphone Voice - for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices,
such as PCs or laptops. This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple
VLANs, if at all, and are typically configured to use an 'untagged' VLAN or a single
'tagged' data specific VLAN. When a network policy is defined for use with an 'untagged'
VLAN (see Tagged flag below), then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP
value has relevance.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 141 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
6. Video Conferencing - for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other
similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.
7. Streaming Video - for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution
and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific
network policy treatment. Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be
an intended use of this application type.
8. Video Signalling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a separate
policy for the video signalling than for the video media. This application type should not
be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video
Conferencing application policy.
Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a 'tagged' or an 'untagged'
VLAN.
Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such
does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003. In this case, both the
VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has
Tag
relevance.
Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format, and
that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used, as well as the
DSCP value. The tagged format includes an additional field, known as the tag header.
The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE
802.1Q-2003.
VLAN ID
VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003.
L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type. L2
L2 Priority
Priority may specify one of eight priority levels (0 through 7), as defined by IEEE
802.1D-2004. A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE
802.1D-2004.
DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application
DSCP
type as defined in IETF RFC 2474. DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values (0
through 63). A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC
2475.
Adding a new policy
33710 Rev. A
Click the Add New Policy button to add a new policy. Specify the Application type,
Tag, VLAN ID, L2 Priority and DSCP for the new policy. Click "Save". The number of
https://www.transition.com
Page 142 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
policies supported is 32.
Port Policies Configuration
Port
Policy Id
The port number to which the configuration applies.
The set of policies that shall apply to a given port. The set of policies is selected by
check marking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 143 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.82 MAC Table
The MAC Address Table is configured on this page. Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and
configure the static MAC table here. Click the Add New Static Entry button to add a new entry to the
static MAC table.
Object
Description
Aging Configuration
Disable Automatic Aging
Disable the automatic aging of dynamic entries by ticking the item.
Aging Time
Enter a value in seconds. The allowed range is 10 to 1000000 seconds.
MAC Table Learning
Auto
Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received.
Disable
No learning is done.
Only static MAC entries are learned, all other frames are dropped.
Note: Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac
Secure
Table before changing to secure learning mode, otherwise the management link is
lost and can only be restored by using another non-secure port or by connecting to
the switch via the serial interface.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 144 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Static MAC Table Learning
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
VLAN ID
The VLAN ID of the entry.
MAC Address
The MAC address of the entry.
Port Members
Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry. Check or uncheck as
needed to modify the entry.
Click the
Adding a New Static Entry
button to add a new entry to the static MAC table.
Specify the VLAN ID, MAC address, and port members for the new entry.
Click "Save" when done.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 145 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.83 VLANs
This page allows for controlling VLAN configuration on the switch. The page is divided into a global section
and a per-port configuration section.
Object
Description
Global VLAN Configuration
This field shows the allowed Access VLANs, i.e. it only affects ports configured as
Access ports. Ports in other modes are members of all VLANs specified in the
Allowed VLANs field. By default, only VLAN 1 is enabled. More VLANs may be
Allowed Access VLANs
created by using a list syntax where the individual elements are separated by
commas. Ranges are specified with a dash separating the lower and upper bound.
The following example will create VLANs 1, 10, 11, 12, 13, 200, and 300:
1,10-13,200,300. Spaces are allowed in between the delimiters.
Ethertype for Custom
This field specifies the ethertype/TPID (specified in hexadecimal) used for Custom
S-ports
S-ports. The setting is in force for all ports whose Port Type is set to S-Custom-Port.
Port VLAN Configuration
Port
This is the logical port number of this row.
The port mode (default is Access) determines the fundamental behavior of the port in
question. A port can be in one of three modes as described below.
Mode
Whenever a particular mode is selected, the remaining fields in that row will be either
grayed out or made changeable depending on the mode in question.
Grayed out fields show the value that the port will get when the mode is applied.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 146 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Access: Access ports are normally used to connect to end stations. Dynamic
features like Voice VLAN may add the port to more VLANs behind the scenes. Access
ports have the following characteristics:

Member of exactly one VLAN, the Port VLAN (a.k.a. Access VLAN), which
by default is 1

Accepts untagged and C-tagged frames

Discards all frames that are not classified to the Access VLAN

On egress all frames classified to the Access VLAN are transmitted
untagged. Other (dynamically added VLANs) are transmitted tagged
Trunk: Trunk ports can carry traffic on multiple VLANs simultaneously, and are
normally used to connect to other switches. Trunk ports have the following
characteristics:
 By default, a trunk port is member of all VLANs (1-4095)
 The VLANs that a trunk port is member of may be limited by the use of
Allowed VLANs
 Frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of are discarded
 By default, all frames but frames classified to the Port VLAN (a.k.a. Native
VLAN) get tagged on egress. Frames classified to the Port VLAN do not get
C-tagged on egress
 Egress tagging can be changed to tag all frames, in which case only tagged
frames are accepted on ingress
Hybrid: Hybrid ports resemble trunk ports in many ways, but add additional port
configuration features. In addition to the characteristics described for trunk ports,
hybrid ports have these abilities:
 Can be configured to be VLAN tag unaware, C-tag aware, S-tag aware, or
S-custom-tag aware
 Ingress filtering can be controlled.
 Ingress acceptance of frames and configuration of egress tagging can be
configured independently.
Determines the port's VLAN ID (a.k.a. PVID). Allowed VLANs are in the range 1
Port VLAN
through 4095, default being 1.
On ingress, frames get classified to the Port VLAN if the port is configured as VLAN
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 147 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
unaware, the frame is untagged, or VLAN awareness is enabled on the port, but the
frame is priority tagged (VLAN ID = 0).
On egress, frames classified to the Port VLAN do not get tagged if Egress Tagging
configuration is set to untag Port VLAN.
The Port VLAN is called an "Access VLAN" for ports in Access mode and Native
VLAN for ports in Trunk or Hybrid mode.
Ports in hybrid mode allow for changing the port type, that is, whether a frame's VLAN
tag is used to classify the frame on ingress to a particular VLAN, and if so, which TPID
it reacts on. Likewise, on egress, the Port Type determines the TPID of the tag, if a tag
is required.
Unaware: On ingress, all frames, whether carrying a VLAN tag or not, get classified to
the Port VLAN, and possible tags are not removed on egress.
C-Port: On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with TPID = 0x8100 get classified to the
VLAN ID embedded in the tag. If a frame is untagged or priority tagged, the frame
gets classified to the Port VLAN. If frames must be tagged on egress, they will be
Port Type
tagged with a C-tag.
S-Port: On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with TPID = 0x8100 or 0x88A8 get
classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag. If a frame is untagged or priority
tagged, the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN. If frames must be tagged on
egress, they will be tagged with an S-tag.
S-Custom-Port: On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with a TPID = 0x8100 or equal
to the Ethertype configured for Custom-S ports get classified to the VLAN ID
embedded in the tag. If a frame is untagged or priority tagged, the frame gets
classified to the Port VLAN. If frames must be tagged on egress, they will be tagged
with the custom S-tag.
Hybrid ports allow for changing ingress filtering. Access and Trunk ports always have
ingress filtering enabled.
If ingress filtering is enabled (checkbox is checked), frames classified to a VLAN that
Ingress Filtering
the port is not a member of get discarded.
If ingress filtering is disabled, frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a
member of are accepted and forwarded to the switch engine. However, the port will
never transmit frames classified to VLANs that it is not a member of.
Ingress Acceptance
33710 Rev. A
Hybrid ports allow for changing the type of frames that are accepted on ingress.
Tagged and Untagged: Both tagged and untagged frames are accepted.
https://www.transition.com
Page 148 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Tagged Only: Only tagged frames are accepted on ingress. Untagged frames are
discarded.
Untagged Only: Only untagged frames are accepted on ingress. Tagged frames are
discarded.
Ports in Trunk and Hybrid mode may control the tagging of frames on egress.
Untag Port VLAN: Frames classified to the Port VLAN are transmitted untagged.
Other frames are transmitted with the relevant tag.
Egress Tagging
Tag All: All frames, whether classified to the Port VLAN or not, are transmitted with a
tag.
Untag All: All frames, whether classified to the Port VLAN or not, are transmitted
without a tag.
This option is only available for ports in Hybrid mode.
Ports in Trunk and Hybrid mode may control which VLANs they are allowed to
become members of. Access ports can only be member of one VLAN, the Access
VLAN.
Allowed VLANs
The field's syntax is identical to the syntax used in the Enabled VLANs field. By
default, a Trunk or Hybrid port will become member of all VLANs, and is therefore set
to 1-4095.
The field may be left empty, which means that the port will not become member of any
VLANs.
A port may be configured to never be member of one or more VLANs. This is
particularly useful when dynamic VLAN protocols like MVRP and GVRP must be
prevented from dynamically adding ports to VLANs.
Forbidden VLANs
The trick is to mark such VLANs as forbidden on the port in question. The syntax is
identical to the syntax used in the Enabled VLANs field.
By default, the field is left blank, which means that the port may become a member of
all possible VLANs.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 149 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.84 Private VLANs
In a private VLAN, PVLANs provide layer 2 isolation between ports within the same broadcast domain.
Isolated ports configured as part of PVLAN cannot communicate with each other. Member ports of a
PVLAN can communicate with each other.
2.3.1.85 Membership
The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here. Private
VLANs can be added or deleted here. Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed here.
Private VLANs are based on the source port mask, and there are no connections to VLANs. This means
that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical.
A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets. By default, all
ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1.
A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN, but it can be a member of multiple Private
VLANs.
Click the Add New Private VLAN button to add a row to the table, enter a PVLAN ID, and then select Port
Members.
Object
Delete
PVLAN ID
Description
To delete a private VLAN entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted during the next
save.
Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN.
A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID. To include a port
Port Members
in a Private VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the Private VLAN,
make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes are
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 150 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
unchecked.
Click the Add New Private VLAN button to add a new private VLAN ID.
An empty row is added to the table, and the private VLAN can be configured as needed.
The allowed range for a private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range. Any
Adding a New Private
values outside this range are not accepted, and a warning message appears. Click "OK" to
VLAN
discard the incorrect entry, or click "Cancel" to return to the editing and make a correction.
The Private VLAN is enabled when you click "Save".
The
button can be used to undo the addition of new Private VLANs.
Buttons
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Click to add a new private VLAN ID.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 151 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.86 Port Isolation
This page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN. A port member of a
VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN.
Object
Description
A checkbox is provided for each port of a private VLAN.
Port Number
When checked, port isolation is enabled on that port.
When unchecked, port isolation is disabled on that port.
By default, port isolation is disabled on all ports.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 152 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.87 VCL
2.3.1.88 MAC-based VLAN
MAC-based VLAN entries can be configured here. This page lets you add and delete MAC-based VLAN
entries and assign the entries to different ports. This page shows only static entries. Click the Add New
Entry button to add a row to the table, enter a PVLAN ID, and then select Port Members.
Object
Delete
Description
To delete a MAC-based VLAN entry, check this box and press save. The entry will be
deleted.
MAC Address
Indicates the MAC address.
VLAN ID
Indicates the VLAN ID.
A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC-based VLAN entry. To
Port Members
include a port in a MAC-based VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port
from the MAC-based VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are
members, and all boxes are unchecked.
Click
to add a new MAC-based VLAN entry. An empty row is
added to the table, and the MAC-based VLAN entry can be configured as needed.
Any unicast MAC address can be configured for the MAC-based VLAN entry. No
Adding a New MAC-based
broadcast or multicast MAC addresses are allowed. Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1
VLAN
through 4095.
The MAC-based VLAN entry is enabled
when you click on "Save". A MAC-based
VLAN without any port members will be deleted when you click "Save".
The
button can be used to undo the addition of new MAC-based VLANs.
The maximum possible MAC-based VLAN entries are limited to 256.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 153 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Refreshes the displayed table.
Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC-based VLAN Table.
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 154 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.89 Protocol-based VLAN
2.3.1.90 Protocol to Group
This page lets you add new protocols to Group Name (unique for each Group) mapping entries as well as
allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the switch.
Object
Delete
Description
To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted on
the switch during the next Save.
Frame Type can have one of the following values:
Ethernet: Match EtherType frames.
LLC: Match (LLC) frames.
Frame Type
SNAP: Match (SNAP) frames.
Note: On changing the Frame type field, valid value of the following text field will vary
depending on the new frame type you selected.
Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the
preceding Frame Type selection menu.
Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types:
Value
For Ethernet: Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is
called etype. Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600-0xffff
For LLC: Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub-values.
a. DSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 155 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
b. SSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)
For SNAP: Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub-values.
a. OUI: OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) is value in format of xx-xx-xx where
each pair (xx) in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from 0x00-0xff.
b. PID: If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000, the protocol ID is the Ethernet type
(EtherType) field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP; if the OUI is an OUI for
a particular organization, the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the
protocol running on top of SNAP.
In other words, if value of OUI field is 00-00-00 then value of PID will be etype
(0x0600-0xffff) and if value of OUI is other than 00-00-00 then valid value of PID will be
any value from 0x0000 to 0xffff.
A valid Group Name is a unique 16-character long string for every entry which consists of a
Group Name
combination of alphabets (a-z or A-Z) and integers (0-9).
Note: special character and underscore (_) are not allowed.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry. Up to 128 Protocol to Group are
supported.
Click to add a new entry in mapping table.
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 156 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.91 Group to VLAN
This page lets you map an already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the switch.
Object
Delete
Description
To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted on
the switch during the next Save.
A valid Group Name is a string at the most 16 characters which consists of a
combination of alphabets (a-z or A-Z) and integers(0-9), no special character is allowed.
Group Name
Whichever Group name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group
mapping table and must not be pre-used by any other existing mapping entry on this
page.
VLAN ID
Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped. A valid VLAN ID ranges from
1-4095.
A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID
Port Members
mapping. To include a port in a mapping, check the box. To remove or exclude the port
from the mapping, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members,
and all boxes are unchecked.
Adding a New Group to
Click
to add a new entry in mapping table. An empty row is added to
VLAN mapping entry
the table; the Group Name, VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed.
Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.
The
button can be used to undo the addition of new entry. The maximum
possible Group to VLAN mappings is limited to 64.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 157 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Click to add a new entry in mapping table. Valid values for a VLAN ID are 1 - 4095.
The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry. The maximum possible Group
to VLAN mappings are limited to 64.
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 158 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.92 IP Subnet-based VLAN
The IP subnet-based VLAN entries can be configured here. This page allows for adding, updating and
deleting IP subnet-based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports. This page shows only
static entries.
Object
Delete
Description
To delete an IP subnet-based VLAN entry, check this box and press save. The entry will be
deleted.
Indicates the index of the entry. It is user configurable. Its value ranges from 0-128.
VCE ID
If a VCE ID is 0, application will auto-generate the VCE ID for that entry.
Deletion and lookup of IP subnet-based VLAN are based on VCE ID.
IP Address
Indicates the IP address.
Mask Length
Indicates the network mask length.
VLAN ID
Indicates the VLAN ID. VLAN ID can be changed for the existing entries.
A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each IP subnet-based VLAN entry.
Port Members
To include a port in a IP subnet-based VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port
from the IP subnet-based VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are
members, and all boxes are unchecked.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 159 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Click to add a new IP subnet-based VLAN entry. Legal VLAN ID values are 1 - 4095.
Click the button to undo the addition of new IP subnet-based VLANs. The maximum
possible IP subnet-based VLAN entries are limited to 128.
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Refreshes the displayed table.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 160 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.93 Voice VLAN
2.3.1.94 Voice VLAN Configuration
The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN, then the switch can classify
and schedule network traffic. It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port - one for voice, one
for data. Before connecting the IP device to the switch, the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID
correctly through its own GUI.
Object
Description
Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation. We must disable MSTP feature before we
Mode
enable Voice VLAN. It can avoid the conflict of ingress filtering. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN mode operation.
Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN mode operation.
Indicates the Voice VLAN ID. It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot
VLAN ID
equal each port PVID. It is a conflict in configuration if the value equals management
VID, MVR VID, PVID etc. The allowed range is 1 to 4095.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 161 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning aging time. The allowed range is 10 to
10000000 seconds. It is used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled. In
Aging Time
other cases, it will be based on hardware aging time. The actual aging time will be
situated between the [age_time; 2 * age_time] interval.
Traffic Class
Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class. All traffic on the Voice VLAN will apply this class.
Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode. Possible port modes are:
Disabled: Disjoin from Voice VLAN.
Mode
Auto: Enable auto detect mode. It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached to the
specific port and configures the Voice VLAN members automatically.
Forced: Force join to Voice VLAN.
Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode. When the function is enabled, all
non-telephonic MAC addresses in the Voice VLAN will be blocked for 10 seconds.
Security
Possible port modes are:
Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation.
Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation.
Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol. It will only work when auto detect
mode is enabled. We should enable LLDP feature before configuring discovery protocol
to "LLDP" or "Both". Changing the discovery protocol to "OUI" or "LLDP" will restart auto
Discovery Protocol
detect process. Possible discovery protocols are:
OUI: Detect telephony device by OUI address.
LLDP: Detect telephony device by LLDP.
Both: Both OUI and LLDP.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 162 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.95 Voice VLAN OUI
Configure VOICE VLAN OUI Table on this page. The maximum number of entries is 16. Modifying the OUI
table will restart auto detection of the OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) process.
Object
Delete
Telephony OUI
Description
Description
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
A telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE.
It must be 6 characters long and the input format is "xx-xx-xx" (x is a hexadecimal digit).
The description of OUI address. Normally, it describes which vendor telephony device it
belongs to. The allowed string length is 0 to 32.
Buttons
Click to add a new access management entry.
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 163 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.96 QoS
2.3.1.97 Port Classification
This page lets you configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all
switch ports.
Object
Port
Description
The port number for which the configuration below applies.
Controls the default class of service (CoS). All frames are classified to a CoS. There is a
one-to-one mapping between CoS, queue and priority. A CoS of 0 (zero) has the lowest
priority.
CoS
If the port is VLAN aware, the frame is tagged and Tag Class. is enabled, then the frame is
classified to a CoS that is mapped from the PCP and DEI value in the tag. Otherwise the
frame is classified to the default CoS. The classified CoS can be overruled by a QCL entry.
Note: If the default CoS has been dynamically changed, then the actual default CoS is shown
in parentheses after the configured default CoS.
Controls the default drop precedence level. All frames are classified to a drop precedence
DPL
level. If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged, then the frame is classified to a DPL
that is equal to the DEI value in the tag. Otherwise the frame is classified to the default DPL.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 164 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
If the port is VLAN aware, the frame is tagged and Tag Class. is enabled, then the frame is
classified to a DPL that is mapped from the PCP and DEI value in the tag. Otherwise the
frame is classified to the default DPL. The classified DPL can be overruled by a QCL entry.
Controls the default PCP value. All frames are classified to a PCP value.
PCP
If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged, then the frame is classified to the PCP
value in the tag. Otherwise the frame is classified to the default PCP value.
Controls the default DEI value. DEI (Drop Eligible Indicator) is a 1-bit field in the VLAN tag.
DEI
All frames are classified to a DEI value. If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged,
then the frame is classified to the DEI value in the tag. Otherwise the frame is classified to the
default DEI value.
Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port.
Disabled: Use default CoS and DPL for tagged frames.
Enabled: Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames.
Tag Class.
Click on the linked mode (Enabled or Disabled) in order to configure the mode and/or
mapping.
Note: This setting has no affect if the port is VLAN unaware. Tagged frames received on
VLAN unaware ports are always classified to the default CoS and DPL.
DSCP Based
Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification.
The IP/MAC address mode specifying whether the QCL classification must be based on
Address Mode
source (SMAC/SIP) or destination (DMAC/DIP) addresses on this port. Allowed values are:
Source: Enable SMAC/SIP matching.
Destination: Enable DMAC/DIP matching.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 165 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.98 Port Policing
This page lets you configure the Policer settings for all switch ports.
Object
Description
Port
The port number for which the configuration below applies.
Enabled
Controls whether the policer is enabled on this switch port.
Controls the rate for the policer. The default value is 500. This value is restricted to
Rate
100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps" or "fps", and it is restricted to 1-3300 when the "Unit" is
"Mbps" or "kfps".
Unit
Flow Control
Controls the unit of measure for the policer rate as kbps, Mbps, fps or kfps. The default value
is "kbps".
If flow control is enabled and the port is in flow control mode, then pause frames are sent
instead of discarding frames.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 166 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.99 Port Scheduler
This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports.
Object
Port
Description
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Click on the port number in order to configure the port schedulers.
Mode
Shows the scheduling mode for this port.
Qn
Shows the weight for this queue and port.
The QoS Egress Port Scheduler and Shapers for Port 2 are shown below. Note that the default Scheduler
Mode is changed from the default (Strict Priority) to Weighted priority for Port 2.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 167 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
QoS Egress Port Scheduler and Shapers Parameters
This page lets you configure the Scheduler and Shapers for a specific port. The displayed settings are
described below.
Object
Scheduler Mode
Queue Shaper Enable
Description
Controls whether the scheduler mode is "Strict Priority" or "Weighted" on this
switch port.
Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch
port.
Controls the rate for the queue shaper. The default value is 500. This value is
Queue Shaper Rate
restricted to 100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps", and it is restricted to
1-3300 when the "Unit" is "Mbps".
Queue Shaper Unit
Queue Shaper Excess
Queue Scheduler
Weight
Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as "kbps" or "Mbps".
The default value is "kbps".
Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth.
Controls the weight for this queue. The default value is "17". This value is
restricted to 1-100. This parameter is only shown if "Scheduler Mode" is set to
"Weighted".
Queue Scheduler
Shows the weight in percent for this queue. This parameter is only shown if
Percent
"Scheduler Mode" is set to "Weighted".
Port Shaper Enable
Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port.
Controls the rate for the port shaper. The default value is 500. This value is
Port Shaper Rate
restricted to 100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps", and it is restricted to
1-3300 when the "Unit" is "Mbps".
Port Shaper Unit
Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as "kbps" or "Mbps". The
default value is "kbps".
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 168 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.100 Port Shaping
This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shapers for all switch ports.
Object
Port
Description
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Click on the port number in order to configure the port shapers.
Qn
Shows "disabled" or actual queue shaper rate - e.g. "800 Mbps".
Port #
Shows "disabled" or actual port shaper rate - e.g. "800 Mbps".
See the previous section for “QoS Egress Port Scheduler and Shapers” parameter descriptions.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 169 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.101 Port Tag Remarking
This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports.
Object
Port
Description
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Click on the linked port number in order to configure tag remarking.
Shows the tag remarking mode for this port.
Classified: Use classified PCP/DEI values.
Mode
Default: Use default PCP/DEI values.
Mapped: Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level.
Click on a linked port number to configure tag remarking (for Port 2 in the example below).
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 170 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.102 Port DSCP
This page lets you configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports.
Object
Port
Description
The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure DSCP ingress and egress
settings.
In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for individual
Ingress
ports. There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress:
Translate
Classify
Translate
To enable Ingress Translation click the checkbox.
Classification for a port have one of four different values.
Disable: No Ingress DSCP Classification.
DSCP=0: Classify if incoming (or translated if enabled) DSCP is 0.
Classify
Selected: Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP
Translation window for the specific DSCP.
All: Classify all DSCP.
Port Egress Rewriting can be one of these values:
Egress
Disable: No Egress rewrite.
Rewrite
Enable: Rewrite enabled without remapping.
Remap DP Unaware: DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 171 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
DSCP value. The remapped DSCP value is always taken from the 'DSCP Translation > Egress
Remap DP0' table.
Remap DP Aware: DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped
DSCP value. Depending on the DP level of the frame, the remapped DSCP value is either taken
from the 'DSCP Translation> Egress Remap DP0' table or from the 'DSCP Translation >
Egress Remap DP1' table.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 172 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.103 DSCP-Based QoS
This page lets you configure the basic QoS DSCP-based QoS Ingress Classification settings.
Object
DSCP
Description
Maximum number of supported DSCP values is 64.
Controls whether a specific DSCP value is trusted. Only frames with trusted DSCP values are
Trust
mapped to a specific QoS class and Drop Precedence Level. Frames with untrusted DSCP
values are treated as a non-IP frame.
Qos Class
QoS class value can be a value of 0-7.
DPL
Drop Precedence Level (0-1).
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 173 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.104 DSCP Translation
This page lets you configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches. DSCP translation can
be done in Ingress or Egress.
Object
DSCP
Description
Maximum number of supported DSCP values is 64; valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63.
Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class and
Ingress
DPL map. The two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation (Translate and Classify)
are described below.
Translate
DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of (0-63) DSCP values.
Classify
Click to enable Classification at Ingress side.
There are the following configurable parameters for Egress side:
Egress
Remap DP0 Controls the remapping for frames with DP level 0.
Remap DP1 Controls the remapping for frames with DP level 1.
Remap DP0
From the menu, select the DSCP value which you want to remap. DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63.
Remap DP1
From the menu, select the DSCP value which you want to remap. DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 174 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.105 DSCP Classification
This page lets you configure the mapping of QoS class and Drop Precedence Level to DSCP value.
Object
Description
QoS Class
Actual QoS class.
DPL
Actual Drop Precedence Level.
DSCP
Select the classified DSCP value (0-63).
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 175 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.106 QoS Control List
This page shows the QoS Control List (QCL), which is made up of the QCEs. Each row describes a QCE that
is defined. The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch. Click the plus sign (
) to add a new QCE to
the list.
Object
Description
QCE
Indicates the QCE id.
Port
Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE.
Indicates the destination MAC address. Possible values are:
Any: Match any DMAC.
Unicast: Match unicast DMAC.
DMAC
Multicast: Match multicast DMAC.
Broadcast: Match broadcast DMAC.
The default value is 'Any'.
SMAC
Match specific source MAC address or 'Any'.
If a port is configured to match on DMAC/DIP, this field indicates the DMAC.
Indicates tag type. Possible values are:
Any: Match tagged and untagged frames.
Tag Type
Untagged: Match untagged frames.
Tagged: Match tagged frames.
The default value is 'Any'.
VID
PCP
DEI
33710 Rev. A
Indicates (VLAN ID), either a specific VID or range of VIDs. VID can be in the range 1-4095 or
'Any'
Priority Code Point: Valid values of PCP are specific(0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) or range(0-1, 2-3, 4-5,
6-7, 0-3, 4-7) or 'Any'.
Drop Eligible Indicator: Valid value of DEI are 0, 1 or 'Any'.
https://www.transition.com
Page 176 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Indicates the type of frame. Possible values are:
Any: Match any frame type.
Ethernet: Match EtherType frames.
Frame Type
LLC: Match (LLC) frames.
SNAP: Match (SNAP) frames.
IPv4: Match IPv4 frames.
IPv6: Match IPv6 frames.
Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched
with the frame's content.
Action
Possible actions are:
CoS: Classify Class of Service.
DPL: Classify Drop Precedence Level.
DSCP: Classify DSCP value.
You can modify each QCE (QoS Control Entry) in the table using the following buttons:
: Inserts a new QCE before the current row.
Modification
Buttons
: Edits the QCE.
: Moves the QCE up the list.
: Moves the QCE down the list.
: Deletes the QCE.
: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the QCE listings.
The QCE page can display a variety of fields based on the parameters selected.
The QCE page fields are described below.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 177 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Object
Port Members
Description
Check the checkbox to include the port in the QCL entry. By default all ports are included.
Key configuration is described as below:
DMAC Destination MAC address: Values are 'Unicast', 'Multicast', 'Broadcast' or 'Any'.
SMAC Source MAC address:
xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx or 'Any'. If a port is configured to match
on DMAC/DIP, this field is the Destination MAC address.
Tag Value of Tag field can be 'Untagged', 'Tagged' or 'Any'.
VID Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1-4095 or 'Any'; user can enter
either a specific value or a range of VIDs.
PCP Valid value PCP are specific (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) or range (0-1, 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, 0-3,
4-7) or 'Any'.
DEI Valid value of DEI can be '0', '1' or 'Any'.
Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values:
Any: Allow all types of frames.
EtherType: Ether Type Valid Ether Type can be 0x600-0xFFFF excluding 0x800(IPv4)
and 0x86DD(IPv6) or 'Any'.
LLC: SSAP Address Valid SSAP(Source Service Access Point) can vary from 0x00 to
0xFF or 'Any'.
Key parameters
DSAP Address Valid DSAP(Destination Service Access Point) can vary from 0x00 to
0xFF or 'Any'.
Control Valid Control field can vary from 0x00 to 0xFF or 'Any'.
SNAP: PID Valid PID (a.k.a Ether Type) can be 0x0000-0xFFFF or 'Any'.
IPv4: Protocol IP protocol number: (0-255, 'TCP' or 'UDP') or 'Any'.
Source IP Specific Source IP address in value/mask format or 'Any'. IP and Mask are in
the format x.y.z.w where x, y, z, and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255. When
Mask is converted to a 32-bit binary string and read from left to right, all bits following the
first zero must also be zero. If a port is configured to match on DMAC/DIP, this field is the
Destination IP address.
IP Fragment IPv4 frame fragmented option: 'Yes', 'No' or 'Any'.
DSCP Diffserv Code Point value (DSCP): It can be a specific value, range of values or
'Any'. DSCP values are in the range 0-63 including BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43.
Sport Source TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range applicable for IP
protocol UDP/TCP.
Dport Destination TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range applicable for IP
protocol UDP/TCP.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 178 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
IPv6: Protocol IP protocol number: (0-255, 'TCP' or 'UDP') or 'Any'.
Source IP 32 LS bits of IPv6 source address in value/mask format or 'Any'. If a port is
configured to match on DMAC/DIP, this field is the Destination IP address.
DSCP Diffserv Code Point value (DSCP): It can be a specific value, range of values or
'Any'. DSCP values are in the range 0-63 including BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43.
Sport Source TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range applicable for IP
protocol UDP/TCP.
Dport Destination TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range applicable for IP
protocol UDP/TCP.
CoS Class of Service: (0-7) or 'Default'.
Action Parameters
DP Drop Precedence Level: (0-1) or 'Default'.
DSCP: (0-63, BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43) or 'Default'.
'Default' means that the default classified value is not modified by this QCE.
Buttons
Click to save the configuration and move to main QCL page.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Return to the previous page without saving the configuration change.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 179 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.107 Storm Control
Storm control for the switch is configured on this page.
There is a Unicast storm rate control, Multicast storm rate control, and a Broadcast storm rate control.
These only affect flooded frames, i.e. frames with a (VLAN ID, DMAC) pair not present on the MAC
Address table.
The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast, multicast or broadcast traffic across the
switch.
Object
Frame Type
Enable
Rate
Description
The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here: Unicast, Multicast or
Broadcast.
Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type.
The rate unit is packets per second (pps). Valid values are: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256,
512, 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K, 32K, 64K, 128K, 256K, 512K or 1024K.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 180 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.108 Mirror
Configure port Mirroring on this page. To debug network problems, selected traffic can be copied, or
mirrored, on a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow.
The traffic to be copied on the mirror port is selected as follows:

All frames received on a given port (also known as ingress or source mirroring).

All frames transmitted on a given port (also known as egress or destination mirroring).
Object
Port to mirror to
Port
Description
Port to mirror also known as the mirror port. Frames from ports that have either source (rx) or
destination (tx) mirroring enabled are mirrored on this port. Disabled disables mirroring.
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Select the mirror mode.
Rx only Frames received on this port are mirrored on the mirror port. Frames transmitted are
Mode
not mirrored.
Tx only Frames transmitted on this port are mirrored on the mirror port. Frames received are
not mirrored.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 181 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Disabled Neither frames transmitted nor frames received are mirrored.
Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored on the mirror port.
Note: For a given port, a frame is only transmitted once. It is therefore not possible to mirror
the
mirror port Tx frames. So mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx only.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 182 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.109 GVRP
2.3.1.110 GVRP Global Config
This page lets you configure the basic GVRP settings for all switch ports. GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration
Protocol or Generic VLAN Registration Protocol) is a protocol that facilitates control of virtual local area
networks (VLANs) within a larger network . GVRP conforms to the IEEE 802.1Q specification, which defines
a method of tagging frames with VLAN configuration data.
Object
Enable GVRP
Description
Check the box to enable GVRP globally.
Join-time is a value in the range 1-20 in the units of centi seconds, i.e. in
units of one hundredth of a second. The default is 20.
GVRP Protocol timers
Leave-time is a value in the range 60-300 in the units of centi seconds, i.e. in
units of one hundredth of a second. The default is 60.
LeaveAll-time is a value in the range 1000-5000 in the units of centi
seconds, i.e. in units of one hundredth of a second. The default is 1000.
When GVRP is enabled a maximum number of VLANs supported by GVRP
Max VLANs
is specified. By default this number is 20. This number can only be changed
when GVRP is turned off.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 183 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to refresh the page immediately. Note that unsaved changes will be lost.
2.3.1.111 GVRP Port Config
This page lets you enable a port for GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol or Generic VLAN
Registration Protocol).
Object
Mode
Description
Enable a port for GVRP; the default is Disabled.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 184 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.112 sFlow
This page allows for configuring sFlow. The configuration is divided into two parts: configuration of the
sFlow receiver (a.k.a. sFlow collector) and configuration of per-port flow and counter samplers. sFlow
configuration is not persisted to non-volatile memory, which means that a reboot will disable sFlow
sampling.
sFlow is an industry standard technology for monitoring switched networks through random sampling of
packets on switch ports and time-based sampling of port counters. The sampled packets and counters
(referred to as flow samples and counter samples, respectively) are sent as sFlow UDP datagrams to a
central network traffic monitoring server. This central server is called an sFlow receiver or sFlow collector.
Additional information can be found at http://sflow.org.
Object
Description
Agent Configuration
IP Address
33710 Rev. A
The IP address used as Agent IP address in sFlow datagrams. It serves as a unique
key that will identify this agent over extended periods of time. Both IPv4 and IPv6
https://www.transition.com
Page 185 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
addresses are supported.
Receiver Configuration
Basically, sFlow can be configured in two ways: through local management using the
Web or CLI interface or through SNMP. This read-only field shows the owner of the
current sFlow configuration and assumes values as follows:
• If sFlow is currently unconfigured/unclaimed, Owner contains <none>.
• If sFlow is currently configured through Web or CLI, Owner contains <Configured
through local management>.
• If sFlow is currently configured through SNMP, Owner contains a string identifying the
Owner
sFlow receiver.
If sFlow is configured through SNMP, all controls - except for the Release-button - are
disabled to avoid inadvertent reconfiguration.
The
button allows for releasing the current owner and disable sFlow
sampling. The button is disabled if sFlow is currently unclaimed. If configured through
SNMP, the release must be confirmed (a confirmation request will appear).
IP Address/Hostname
UDP Port
The IP address or hostname of the sFlow receiver. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are
supported.
The UDP port on which the sFlow receiver listens to sFlow datagrams. If set to 0 (zero),
the default port (6343) is used.
The number of seconds remaining before sampling stops and the current sFlow owner
Timeout
is released. While active, the current time left can be updated with a click on the
Refresh-button. If locally managed, the timeout can be changed on the fly without
affecting any other settings.
The maximum number of data bytes that can be sent in a single sample datagram. This
Max. Datagram Size
should be set to a value that avoids fragmentation of the sFlow datagrams. Valid range
is 200 to 1468 bytes with default being 1400 bytes.
Port Configuration
Port
The port number for which the configuration below applies.
Flow Sampler Enabled
Enables/disables flow sampling on this port.
The statistical sampling rate for packet sampling. Set to N to sample on average 1/Nth
Flow Sampler Sampling
of the packets transmitted/received on the port.
Rate
Not all sampling rates are achievable. If an unsupported sampling rate is requested,
the switch will automatically adjust it to the closest achievable. This will be reported
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 186 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
back in this field.
The maximum number of bytes that should be copied from a sampled packet to the
Flow Sampler Max.
sFlow datagram. Valid range is 14 to 200 bytes with default being 128 bytes.
Header
If the maximum datagram size does not take into account the maximum header size,
samples may be dropped.
Counter Poller Enabled
Counter Poller Interval
Enables/disables counter polling on this port.
With counter polling enabled, this specifies the interval - in seconds - between counter
poller samples.
Buttons
The Release button allows for releasing the current owner and disable sFlow sampling.
The button is disabled if sFlow is currently unclaimed. If configured through SNMP, the
release must be confirmed (a confirmation request will appear). See description under
Owner above.
Click to refresh the page immediately. Note that unsaved changes will be lost.
Click to save changes. Note that sFlow configuration is not persisted to non-volatile
memory.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 187 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.113 Redundant Ring & Chain Configuration
This page provides Redundant Ring and Redundant Chain related configuration.
Ring protection (redundancy) is used to prevent network breaks caused by link loss or network device
error. Ring protection guarantees quick network reconfiguration after the loss of a network link.
Ring topologies supported include Single Ring, Dual-ring, Ring Coupling, Multiple Ring Coupling, Dual
Homing, Multiple Dual Homing, Chain, and Balancing Chain. Multiple Ring types (combination of different
rings) is also supported. All the ports that participate in Ring/Chain topology are configured as Trunk ports.
Note: when configuring a redundant ring, all switches on the same ring must be configured to use the
same redundancy protocol (you can not mix Ring protocols on the same ring).
Note that Ring protection is a media redundancy protocol; you must disable any other loop protection
first (before enabling the Ring/Chain):
□
Disable Spanning Tree at Configuration > Spanning Tree > CIST Ports. Click Save.
□
Disable Loop Protection at Configuration > Loop Protection > General Settings and at
Configuration > Loop Protection > Port Configuration. Click Save when done.
Object
Description
The group index. This parameter is used to easily identify the ring when you configuring it.
Index
Group 1 (Index 1) - supports configuration of Ring (slave or master).
Group 2 (Index 2) - supports configuration of Ring, Coupling, and Dual Homing.
Group 3 (Index 3) - supports configuration of Chain and Balancing-Chain.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 188 of 328
Transition Networks
33710 Rev. A
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
https://www.transition.com
Page 189 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Enable Ring on the specific group. When Group 1 or 2 is enabled, all configuration of Group 3
will be reset to defaults. All Group 3 configuration options will be locked.
Mode
To configure Group 3, both Group1 and 2 must be disabled first. When Group 3 is enabled, all
configuration of Group1 and 2 will be reset to defaults. All Group 1 and 2 configuration options
will be locked.
Configure the Ring group on this switch as specific role.
Role
Group 1 - supports options of ring-master or ring-slave.
Ring - select Ring (Master) or Ring (Slave).
Group 2 - support configuration of the ring, coupling, and dual-homing.
Ring
- select master or slave.
Coupling – select primary and backup.
Dual-Homing
Group 3 - support configuration of the chain and balancing-chain.
Chain
- select head, tail, or member.
Balancing Chain - select central-block, terminal-1/2 or member.
Note 1: Group 1 must be enabled before enable Group 2 to coupling.
Note 2: When Group 1 or 2 is enabled, the configuration of Group 3 will be disabled.
Note 3: When Group 3 is enabled, the configuration of Group 1 and 2 will be disabled.
Select ring port(s). Each ring port must be unique, CANNOT be configured in different groups;
and 2 ring ports between ring/chain CANNOT be the same.

When role is ring/master, one ring port is forward port and another is block port.
The block port is the redundant port; it is blocking port in normal state.

When role is ring/slave, both ring ports are forward port.

When role is coupling/primary, only need one ring port named primary port.

When role is coupling/backup, only need one ring port named backup port. This backup
port is redundant port; it is blocking port in normal state.
Ring Port(s)

When role is dual-homing, one ring port is primary port and another is backup port.
This backup port is redundant port; it is blocking port in normal state.

When role is chain/head, one ring port is member port and another is head port. Both
ring ports are forwarding port in normal state.

When role is chain/tail, one ring port is member port and another is tail port. The tail port
is redundant port; it is blocking port in normal state.

When role is chain/member, both ring ports are member port. Both ring ports are
forwarding port in normal state.

33710 Rev. A
When role is balancing-chain/central-block, one ring port is member port and another is
https://www.transition.com
Page 190 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
block port. The block port is redundant port; it is blocking port in normal state.

When role is balancing-chain/terminal-1/2, one ring port is member port and another is
terminal port. Both ring ports are forwarding port in normal state.

When role is balancing-chain/member, both ring ports are member port. Both ring ports
are forwarding port in normal state.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
The table below lists the main differences between the features of the protocols. Use this information to
determine which features are best suited for your network.
Feature
Ring
Ring V2
Chain
STP
RSTP
Topology
Ring
Ring
Chain
Ring, Mesh
Ring, Mesh
Recovery Time
< 300 ms
< 20 ms
< 20 ms
Up to 30 sec.
Up to 5 sec
Ringv2 Notes
□
A Ring has one Master; others are slaves.
□
Group 1 (Index 1) supports configuration of Ring.
□
Group 2 (Index 2) supports configuration of Dual Ring, Ring Coupling, and Dual-Homing.
□
Group 3 (Index 3) supports configuration of Chain and Balancing-Chain.
□
All the ports that participate in a Ring/Chain topology are configured to Trunk mode. Ring Ports are
configured as Trunks (at Configuration > VLANs).
□
Do not physically connect the Ethernet cable before finishing configuring Ringv2, as this will cause
a loop.
□
In a VLAN environment, you must set Redundant Port, Coupling Port, and Coupling Control Port to
join all VLANs, since these ports act as the backbone to transmit all packets of different VLANs to
different switches.
Single Ring Notes
□
Single Ring is the most commonly used and easily configured ring protection methods.
□
With Ring Port, two ports of each device are selected as ring ports.
□
Ring Roles: a Master (a forwarding port as the main path for traffic and a blocking port for the
protect path, and a Slave with two forwarding ports for communication in ring.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 191 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Dual Ring Notes
□
Dual ring can tolerate two links down.
□
With Dual Rings, one port on each of two switches is configured as a Ring Master.
Coupling Ring Notes
□
Coupling uses 2 link paths connect one Ring to another (Ring / Switch Chain, etc.).
□
Coupling mode can only be enabled if the switch has already been configured Single Ring; if a
switch is configured Dual Ring, this switch is prohibited having coupling).
□
The 2 links configured by Coupling are redundant path for each other. Ring Port:
• Primary: in the primary path of ring coupling
• Backup: in the backup path of ring coupling
Balancing Chain Notes
□
Before configuring balancing chain, disable Ring index 1 and in index 2.
□
Ring Port can include:
•
Terminal Port: ring ports connect between chain and another segment.
•
Central Block Port: a ring port in central block of balancing chain.
•
Member Port: the other ring port joined balancing chain topology.
Dual Homing Notes
□
Dual Homing uses only 1 device to connect another Ring / Switch / Chain, etc.
□
Dual Homing mode can only be enabled in a switch configured as Single Ring.
□
The two links run as redundant paths for each other. A Ring Port has Primary and Backup ports;
both are on the same switch.
Ring Topology Examples
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 192 of 328
Transition Networks
33710 Rev. A
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
https://www.transition.com
Page 193 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Messages
RingV2 Configure Error
Group1's two ring ports must be different.
RingV2 Configure Error
Group1 and group2 must configure different ring port.
RingV2 Configure Error
Group3's two chain ports must be different.
Meaning: Redundant Ring or Redundant Chain mis- configuration
Recovery: 1. Click the browser back button to clear the message. 2. At the “Redundant Ring and Redundant
Chain Configuration” table, change one or more parameters (see above). 3. Click the Save button and
continue.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 194 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.3.1.114 DDMI Configuration
This page lets you configure DDMI. Digital Diagnostics Monitoring Interface (DDMI) provides an enhanced
digital diagnostic monitoring interface for optical transceivers which allows real time access to device
operating parameters.
Object
Description
Indicates the DDMI mode operation. Possible modes are:
Mode
Enabled: Enable DDMI mode operation.
Disabled: Disable DDMI mode operation.
Buttons
Click to save changes.
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Navigate to the Monitor > DDMI menu path to view DDMI overview and details. DDMI Mode must be set
to “Enabled” here in order to view DDMI overview and details.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 195 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4 Monitor
2.4.1.1
System
2.4.1.2
System Information
Switch system (Hardware, Time, and Software) information is provided here.
Object
Description
Contact
The system contact configured at Configuration > System > Information > System Contact.
Name
The system name configured at Configuration > System > Information > System Name.
Location
The system location configured at Configuration > System > Information > System Location.
MAC Address
The MAC Address of this switch.
Chip ID
The Chip ID of this switch.
System Date
The current (GMT) system time and date. System time is obtained via the Timing server
running on the switch, if any.
System Uptime
The period of time the device has been operational.
Software Version
The software version of this switch.
Software Date
The date when the switch software was produced.
Acknowledgments
Click the linked Details text to view license information.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 196 of 328
Transition Networks
2.4.1.3
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
CPU Load
This page displays the CPU load in a line chart. The load is measured as averaged over the last 100ms, 1sec and
10 second intervals. The last 1~256 samples (maximum 256) are graphed, and the last numbers are displayed
as text as well.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
The default is enabled (checked).
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 197 of 328
Transition Networks
2.4.1.4
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
IP Status
This page displays the status of the IP protocol layer. The status is defined by the IP interfaces, the IP
routes and the neighbour cache (ARP cache) status.
Object
Description
IP Interfaces
Interface
The name of the interface.
Type
The address type of the entry. This may be LINK or IPv4 or IPv6.
Address
The current address of the interface (of the given type).
Status
The status flags of the interface (and/or address) (e.g., (e.g., UP
LOOPBACK RUNNING MULTICAST).
IP Routes
Network
The destination IP network or host address of this route.
Gateway
The gateway address of this route.
Status
The status flags of the route (e.g., UP, or UP HOST, or UP HW RT).
Neighbor cache
IP Address
The IP address of the entry.
Link Address
The Link (MAC) address for which a binding to the IP address given exist.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 198 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 199 of 328
Transition Networks
2.4.1.5
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
System Log
Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field.
When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.
The "Level" input field is used to filter the display system log entries.
The "Clear Level" input field is used to specify which system log entries will be cleared.
To clear specific system log entries, select the clear level first then click the Clear button.
The "Start from ID" input field lets you change the starting point in this table. Clicking the Refresh button
will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest entry match.
In addition, these input fields will upon a Refresh button click - assume the value of the first displayed
entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start input field.
The >> button will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup.
When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the |<< button
to start over.
Object
Description
Level
Dropdown to select the level of information to display (All, Info, Warning, or Error).
Clear Level
Dropdown to select the level of information to clear (All, Info, Warning, or Error).
ID
The linked index number of the system log entry. Click the linked ID number to display its log
details.
The level of the system log entry:
Level
Info: The system log entry is at information level.
Warning: The system log entry is at warning level.
Error: The system log entry is at error level.
Time
33710 Rev. A
The time and date that the system log entry occurred.
https://www.transition.com
Page 200 of 328
Transition Networks
Message
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
The detailed message text of the system log entry (e.g., Switch just made a cold boot, or Link
up on Port 2.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Updates the table entries, starting from the current entry.
Flushes the selected entries.
Updates the table entries, starting from the first available entry.
Updates the table entries, ending at the last entry currently displayed.
Updates the table entries, starting from the last entry currently displayed.
Updates the table entries, ending at the last available entry.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 201 of 328
Transition Networks
2.4.1.6
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Detailed System Log
The switch detailed system log information is provided here.
To display this page, navigate to the Monitor > System > Log menu path, or at the Monitor > System > Log
page, click a linked ID number to display its log details.
Object
ID
Message
Description
The ID (>= 1) of the system log entry.
The detailed message of the system log entry. Information includes the Level, Time, and
Message text.
Buttons
Updates the system log entry to the current entry ID.
Updates the system log entry to the first available entry ID.
Updates the system log entry to the previous available entry ID.
Updates the system log entry to the next available entry ID.
Updates the system log entry to the last available entry ID.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 202 of 328
Transition Networks
2.4.1.7
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
System Alarm
Current Alarm data and an Alarm history are provided in separate tabs on this page. The Alarm Profile at
Configuration > System > Alarm Profile must be enabled for alarm data to be displayed here. Otherwise
the message No entry exists displays. The Monitor > System > Alarm > Alarm Current page is shown below:
Object
Description
Alarm Type Description. There are ten alarms; GE ports 1-10 generate Port Link
Down. Each type can be configured to Mask and Unmask.
The default for each type is Mask and Minor. If the alarm entry is set to Mask, then no
action occurs.
Description
When a specified alarm condition occurs, if the alarm entry is Unmask, the switch will:
1. Generate an entry in the current alarm table,
2, Insert one entry in the alarm history table,
3. Send an SNMP alarm trap, and
4. Trigger the alarm output relay.
Time
Alarm occurrence/cleared date and time.
On the Alarm History tab, the Alarm State.
State
Set stands for alarm occurs;
Clear stands for alarm disappear.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 203 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh page data immediately.
A sample Monitor > System > Alarm > Alarm History page is shown below:
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 204 of 328
Transition Networks
2.4.1.9
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Green Ethernet
2.4.1.10 Port Power Savings Data
This page provides the current status for EEE (Energy Efficient Ethernet).
Object
Description
Port
This is the logical port number for this row.
Link
Shows if the link is up for the port (green = link up, red = link down).
EEE
LP EEE Cap
Shows if EEE is enabled for the port (reflects the settings at the Port Power
Savings configuration page).
Shows if the link partner is EEE capable.
Shows if the system is currently saving power due to EEE. When EEE is
EEE Savings
enabled, the system will powered down if no frame has been received or
transmitted in 5 uSec.
ActiPhy Savings
Shows if the system is currently saving power due to ActiPHY.
PerfectReach Savings
Shows if the system is currently saving power due to PerfectReach.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 205 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.11 Ports
2.4.1.12 Ports State Overview
Each page provides an overview of the current switch port states (default).
Click the Close link to close the display.
Click the main menu Front Panel item to open the display again.
The port states are shown below:
State
Disabled
Down
Link
RJ45 ports
SFP ports
2.4.1.13 Trafic Overview
This page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports.
Object
Port
Description
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row. The Port number in
each row is linked to its Detailed Port Statistics page; see Detailed Statistics below.
Packets
The number of received and transmitted packets per port.
Bytes
The number of received and transmitted bytes per port.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 206 of 328
Transition Networks
Errors
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete
transmissions per port.
Drops
The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion.
Filtered
The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clears the counters for all ports.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 207 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.14 QoS Statistics
This page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports.
Object
Description
Port
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Q0 - Q7
There are eight QoS queues per port. Q0 is the lowest priority queue.
Rx/Tx
The number of received and transmitted packets per queue.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clears the counters for all ports.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 208 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.15 QCL Status
This page shows the QCL status by different QCL users. Each row describes the QCE that is defined.
It is a conflict if a specific QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. The maximum
number of QCEs is 256 on each switch. This page displays the configurations at the Configuration > QoS
> QoS Control List page.
Object
Description
User
Indicates the QCL user.
QCE
Indicates the QCE id.
Port
Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE.
Indicates the type of frame. Possible values are:
Any: Match any frame type.
Ethernet: Match EtherType frames.
Frame Type
LLC: Match (LLC) frames.
SNAP: Match (SNAP) frames.
IPv4: Match IPv4 frames.
IPv6: Match IPv6 frames
Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are
matched with the frame's content. Possible actions are:
Action
CoS: Classify Class of Service.
DPL: Classify Drop Precedence Level.
DSCP: Classify DSCP value.
Displays Conflict status of QCL entries. As H/W resources are shared by multiple
applications. It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not be available,
Conflict
in that case it shows conflict status as 'Yes', otherwise it is always 'No'. Note that conflict
can be resolved by releasing the H/W resources required to add QCL entry on pressing
'Resolve Conflict' button.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 209 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Select the QCL status from this drop down list.
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to release the resources required to add QCL entry, in case the conflict
status for any QCL entry is 'yes'.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 210 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.16 Detailed Statistics
This page provides detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port. Use the port select box to select which
switch port details to display.
The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit, the size counters for receive and transmit, and
the error counters for receive and transmit.
Object
Description
Receive Total and Transmit Total
Rx and Tx Packets
Rx and Tx Octets
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets.
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) bytes. Includes FCS, but
excludes framing bits.
Rx and Tx Unicast
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) unicast packets.
Rx and Tx Multicast
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) multicast packets.
Rx and Tx Broadcast
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) broadcast packets.
Rx and Tx Pause
A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 211 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation.
Receive and Transmit Size Counters
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets split into categories based on their
respective frame sizes.
Receive and Transmit Queue Counters
The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue.
Receive Error Counters
Rx Drops
The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress
congestion.
Rx CRC/Alignment
The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors.
Rx Undersize
The number of short frames received with valid CRC.
Rx Oversize
The number of long frames received with valid CRC.
Rx Fragments
The number of short frames received with invalid CRC.
Rx Jabber
The number of long frames received with invalid CRC.
1
2
1
2
The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process.
Rx Filtered
1
Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes.
2
Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame
length for this port.
Transmit Error Counters
Tx Drops
The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion.
Tx Late/Exc. Coll
The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 212 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.17 DHCP
2.4.1.18 DHCP Server
2.4.1.19 Statistics
The DHCP Server Statistics page displays the database counters and the number of DHCP messages sent
and received by DHCP server.
Object
Description
Database Counters
Pool
Number of pools.
Excluded IP Address
Number of excluded IP address ranges.
Declined IP Address
Number of declined IP addresses.
Binding Counters
Automatic Binding
Number of bindings with network-type pools.
Manual Binding
Number of bindings that administrator assigns an IP address to a client. That is, the pool is
of host type.
Expired Binding
Number of bindings that their lease time expired or they are cleared from Automatic/Manual
type bindings.
DHCP Message Received Counters
DISCOVER
33710 Rev. A
Number of DHCP DISCOVER messages received.
https://www.transition.com
Page 213 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
REQUEST
Number of DHCP REQUEST messages received.
DECLINE
Number of DHCP DECLINE messages received.
RELEASE
Number of DHCP RELEASE messages received.
INFORM
Number of DHCP INFORM messages received.
DHCP Message Sent Counters
OFFER
Number of DHCP OFFER messages sent.
ACK
Number of DHCP ACK (Acknowledge) messages sent.
NAK
Number of DHCP NAK (Negative Acknowledge) messages sent.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Click to Clears DHCP Message Received Counters and DHCP Message Sent Counters.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 214 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.20 Binding
This page displays bindings generated for DHCP clients.
Object
Description
IP
IP address allocated to DHCP client.
Type
Type of binding. Possible types are Automatic, Manual, Expired.
State
State of binding. Possible states are Committed, Allocated, Expired.
Pool Name
The pool that generates the binding.
Server ID
Server IP address to service the binding.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Click to clear selected bindings. If the selected binding is Automatic or Manual,
then it is changed to be Expired. If the selected binding is Expired, then it is freed.
Click to clear all Automatic bindings and Change them to Expired bindings.
Click to clear all Manual bindings and Change them to Expired bindings.
Click to clear all Expired bindings and free them.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 215 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.21 Declined IP
This page displays declined IP addresses.
Object
Declined IP
Description
List of IP addresses declined by DHCP clients.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 216 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.22 DHCP Snooping Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic DHCP snooping table, default being 20, selected
through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries
from the beginning of the Dynamic DHCP snooping Table. The "MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields let
you select the starting point in the Dynamic DHCP snooping Table. Clicking the
button will
update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic DHCP snooping Table match. In
addition, the two input fields will - upon a
button click - assume the value of the first
displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The
button will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup.
When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the
button to start over.
Object
Description
MAC Address
User MAC address of the entry.
VLAN ID
VLAN-ID in which the DHCP traffic is permitted.
Source Port
Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed.
IP Address
User IP address of the entry.
IP Subnet Mask
User IP subnet mask of the entry.
DHCP Server Address
DHCP Server address of the entry.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 217 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.
Flushes all dynamic entries.
Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic DHCP snooping Table.
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 218 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.23 DHCP Relay Statistics
This page provides statistics for DHCP relay.
Object
Description
Server Statistics
Transmit to Server
The number of packets that are relayed from client to server.
Transmit Error
The number of packets that resulted in errors while being sent to clients.
Receive from Server
The number of packets received from server.
Receive Missing Agent
The number of packets received without agent information options.
Option
Receive Missing Circuit ID
The number of packets received with the Circuit ID option missing.
Receive Missing Remote ID
The number of packets received with the Remote ID option missing.
Receive Bad Circuit ID
The number of packets whose Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID.
Receive Bad Remote ID
The number of packets whose Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID.
Client Statistics
Transmit to Client
The number of relayed packets from server to client.
Transmit Error
The number of packets that resulted in error while being sent to servers.
Receive from Client
The number of received packets from server.
Receive Agent Option
The number of received packets with relay agent information option.
Replace Agent Option
The number of packets which were replaced with relay agent information option.
Keep Agent Option
The number of packets whose relay agent information was retained.
Drop Agent Option
33710 Rev. A
The number of packets that were dropped which were received with relay agent
information.
https://www.transition.com
Page 219 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear all statistics.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 220 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.24 DHCP Detailed Statistics
This page provides statistics for DHCP snooping. Notice that the normal forward per-port TX statistics isn't
increased if the incoming DHCP packet is done by L3 forwarding mechanism. Clearing the statistics on a
specific port may not take effect on global statistics since it gathers the different layer overview.
Object
Description
Rx and Tx Discover
The number of discover (option 53 with value 1) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Offer
The number of offer (option 53 with value 2) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Request
The number of request (option 53 with value 3) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Decline
The number of decline (option 53 with value 4) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx ACK
The number of ACK (option 53 with value 5) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx NAK
The number of NAK (option 53 with value 6) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Release
The number of release (option 53 with value 7) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Inform
The number of inform (option 53 with value 8) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Lease Query
The number of lease query (option 53 with value 10) packets received and
transmitted.
Rx and Tx Lease
The number of lease unassigned (option 53 with value 11) packets received and
Unassigned
transmitted.
Rx and Tx Unknown
Rx and Tx Active
33710 Rev. A
The number of lease unknown (option 53 with value 12) packets received and
transmitted.
The number of lease active (option 53 with value 13) packets received and
transmitted.
https://www.transition.com
Page 221 of 328
Transition Networks
Rx Discarded checksum
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
The number of discard packet that IP/UDP checksum is error.
error
Rx Discarded from
The number of discarded packet that are coming from untrusted port.
Untrusted
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.
Flushes all dynamic entries.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 222 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.25 Security
2.4.1.26 Access Management Statistics
This page provides statistics for access management.
Object
Description
Interface
The interface type through which the remote host can access the switch.
Received Packets
Number of received packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled.
Allowed Packets
Number of allowed packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled.
Discarded Packets
Number of discarded packets from the interface when access management mode is
enabled.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear all statistics.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 223 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.27 Network
2.4.1.28 Port Security
2.4.1.29 Switch
This page shows the Port Security status. Port Security is a module with no direct configuration.
Configuration comes indirectly from other modules - the user modules. When a user module has enabled
port security on a port, the port is set up for software-based learning. In this mode, frames from unknown
MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module, which in turn asks all user modules whether to
allow this new MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state, all
enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward. If only one
chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise.
The status page is divided into two sections - one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual
port status.
Object
Description
User Module Legend
User Module Name
33710 Rev. A
The full name of a module that may request Port Security services.
Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled
https://www.transition.com
Page 224 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Port Security.
A dash (-) means that the corresponding user module is not enabled, whereas a letter
indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter (see Abbr below) has enabled
port security.
Abbr
A one-letter abbreviation of the user module. This is used in the Users column in the port
status table. Limit Control = L, 802.1X = 8, DHCP Snooping = D and Voice VLAN = V.
Port Status
Port
The port number for which the status applies. Click the port number to see the status for
this particular port.
Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled
Users
Port Security or not. A '-' means that the corresponding user module is not enabled,
whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter (see Abbr) has
enabled port security.
Shows the current state of the port. It can take one of four values:
Disabled: No user modules are currently using the Port Security service.
Ready: The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module, and is awaiting
frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive.
Limit Reached: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user
State
module, and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC
addresses should be taken in.
Shutdown: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user
module, and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded. No MAC addresses can
be learned on the port until it is administratively re-opened on the Limit Control
configuration Web-page.
The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses (forwarding as
well as blocked) and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the
MAC Count (Current,
port, respectively.
Limit)
If no user modules are enabled on the port, the Current column will show a dash (-).
If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port, the Limit column will show a
dash (-).
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 225 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 226 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.30 Port
This page shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module. Port Security is a module with
no direct configuration. Configuration comes indirectly from other modules - the user modules.
When a user module has enabled port security on a port, the port is set-up for software-based learning.
In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module, which in
turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC
address to be set in the forwarding state, all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing
the MAC address to forward. If only one chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module
decides otherwise.
Object
Description
MAC Address &
The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port. If no MAC addresses are learned, a
VLAN ID
single row stating "No MAC addresses attached" is displayed.
State
Time of Addition
Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding. In the blocked
state, it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic.
Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port.
If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address, it will stay in the blocked
state until the hold time (in seconds) expires. If all user modules have decided to allow this
MAC address to forward, and aging is enabled, the Port Security module will periodically
Age/Hold
check that this MAC address still forwards traffic.
If the age period (measured in seconds) expires and no frames have been seen, the MAC
address will be removed from the MAC table. Otherwise a new age period will begin.
If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely, a
dash (-) will be shown.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 227 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 228 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.31 NAS
2.4.1.32 Switch
This page provides an overview of the current NAS port states.
Object
Description
Port
The switch port number. Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port.
Admin State
The port's current administrative state. See “NAS Admin State” on page 69 for valid values.
Port State
The current state of the port. Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states.
The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL-based
Last Source
authentication, and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC-based
authentication.
The user name (supplicant identity) carried in the most recently received Response Identity
Last ID
EAPOL frame for EAPOL-based authentication, and the source MAC address from the most
recently received frame from a new client for MAC-based authentication.
QoS Class
QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled.
The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in. The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden
Port VLAN ID
by NAS. If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server, "(RADIUS-assigned)" is appended to
the VLAN ID. If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN, "(Guest)" is appended to the VLAN ID.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 229 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.33 Port
This page provides detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL-based IEEE 802.1X
authentication. For MAC-based ports, it shows selected backend server (RADIUS Authentication Server)
statistics only. Use the port select box to select which port details to be displayed.
Object
Description
Port State
Admin State
Port State
QoS Class
The port's current administrative state. See NAS Admin State on page 69 for a
description of possible values.
The current state of the port. Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual
states.
The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server. The field is blank if no QoS class is
assigned.
The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in. The field is blank, if the Port VLAN ID is not
overridden by NAS.
Port VLAN ID
If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server, "(RADIUS-assigned)" is appended
to the VLAN ID.
If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN, "(Guest)" is appended to the VLAN ID.
Port Counters
These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states:
• Force Authorized
EAPOL Counters
• Force Unauthorized
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X
• Multi 802.1X
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 230 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
These backend (RADIUS) frame counters are available for the following
administrative states:
Backend Server Counters
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-based Auth.
Information about the last supplicant/client that attempted to authenticate. This
information is available for the following administrative states:
Last Supplicant/Client Info
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-based Auth.
Selected Counters
The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is in one of the following
administrative states:
• Multi 802.1X
Selected Counters
• MAC-based Auth.
The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table, and will be
empty if no MAC address is currently selected. To populate the table, select one of the
attached MAC Addresses from the table below.
Attached MAC Addresses
Shows the identity of the supplicant, as received in the Response Identity EAPOL
frame.
Identity
Clicking the link causes the supplicant's EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be
shown in the Selected Counters table. If no supplicants are attached, it shows No
supplicants attached.
This column is not available for MAC-based Auth.
For Multi 802.1X, this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant.
MAC Address
For MAC-based Auth., this column holds the MAC address of the attached client.
Clicking the link causes the client's Backend Server counters to be shown in the
Selected Counters table. If no clients are attached, it shows No clients attached.
VLAN ID
State
33710 Rev. A
This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured
through the Port Security module.
The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated. In the authenticated state,
it is allowed to forward frames on the port, and in the unauthenticated state, it is
https://www.transition.com
Page 231 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
blocked. As long as the backend server hasn't successfully authenticated the client, it
is unauthenticated. If an authentication fails for one or the other reason, the client will
remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds.
Last Authentication
Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client (successful as well as
unsuccessful).
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
This button is available in these modes:
• Force Authorized
• Force Unauthorized
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X
Click to clear the counters for the selected port.
This button is available in these modes:
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-based Auth.X
Click to clear both the port counters and all of the attached client's counters.
The "Last Client" will not be cleared, however.
This button is available in these modes:
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-based Auth.X
Click to clear only the currently selected client's counters.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 232 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.34 ACL Status
This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users. Each row describes the ACE that is defined. It is a
conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. The maximum number
of ACEs is 256 on each switch.
Object
User
Description
Indicates the ACL user.
Indicates the ingress port of the ACE. Possible values are:
Ingress Port
All: The ACE will match all ingress port.
Port: The ACE will match a specific ingress port.
Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Possible values are:
Any: The ACE will match any frame type.
EType: The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames. Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE
will not get matched by IP and ARP frames.
ARP: The ACE will match ARP/RARP frames.
Frame Type
IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.
IPv4/ICMP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.
IPv4/UDP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.
IPv4/TCP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.
IPv4/Other: The ACE will match IPv4 frames, which are not ICMP/UDP/TCP.
IPv6: The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames.
Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.
Action
Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.
Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.
Filter: Frames matching the ACE are filtered.
Rate limiter
33710 Rev. A
Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 16. When Disabled
is displayed, the rate limiter operation is disabled.
https://www.transition.com
Page 233 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE. Frames matching the ACE are redirected to
Port Redirect
the port number. The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number. When
Disabled is displayed, the port redirect operation is disabled.
Specify the mirror operation of this port. The allowed values are:
Mirror
Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.
The default value is "Disabled".
CPU
Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU.
CPU Once
Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU.
Counter
The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.
Conflict
Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE. The specific ACE is not applied to the
hardware due to hardware limitations.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
User dropdown; lets you specify the set of user status to be displayed (Combined, Static, IP
Source Guard, IPMC, ARP Inspection, DHCP, Loop Protect, RING, LLDP, Conflict).
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 234 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.35 ARP Inspection
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table, default being 20, selected
through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries
from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table.
The "Start from port address", "VLAN", "MAC address" and "IP address" input fields lets you select the
starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table. Clicking the
button will update the
displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP Inspection Table match.
In addition, the two input fields will - upon a
button click - assume the value of the first
displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The
button will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup.
When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the
button to start over.
Object
Description
Port
Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed.
VLAN ID
VLAN ID (VID) in which the ARP traffic is permitted.
MAC Address
User MAC address of the entry.
IP Address
User IP address of the entry.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 235 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.
Flushes all dynamic entries.
Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table.
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 236 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.36 IP Source Guard
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic IP Source Guard table, default being 20, selected
through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries
from the beginning of the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table.
The "Start from port address", "VLAN" and "IP address" input fields let you select the starting point in the
Dynamic IP Source Guard Table. Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from
that or the closest next Dynamic IP Source Guard Table match. In addition, the two input fields will - upon
a Refresh button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with
the same start address.
The >> button will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup.
When the end is reached the text "No more entries" displays in the table. Use the |<< button to start over.
Object
Description
Port
Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed.
VLAN ID
VLAN-ID in which the IP traffic is permitted.
IP Address
User IP address of the entry.
MAC Address
Source MAC address.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Refresh the displayed table starting from the input fields.
Flush all dynamic entries.
Update the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table.
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 237 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.37 AAA
2.4.1.38 RADIUS Overview
This page provides an overview of the status of the RADIUS servers configurable on the Authentication
configuration page.
Object
Description
RADIUS Authentication Servers
#
The RADIUS server number. Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server.
IP Address
The IP address and UDP port number (in <IP Address>:<UDP Port> notation) of this server.
The current status of the server. This field takes one of the following values:
Disabled: The server is disabled.
Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.
Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS module
Status
is ready to accept access attempts.
Dead (X seconds left): Access attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply within
the configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled
when the dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in
parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled.
RADIUS Accounting Servers
#
33710 Rev. A
The RADIUS server number. Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server.
https://www.transition.com
Page 238 of 328
Transition Networks
IP Address
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
The IP address and UDP port number (in <IP Address>:<UDP Port> notation) of this server.
The current status of the server. This field takes one of the following values:
Disabled: The server is disabled.
Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.
Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS module
Status
is ready to accept accounting attempts.
Dead (X seconds left): Accounting attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply
within the configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get
re-enabled when the dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is
displayed in parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server is
enabled.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 239 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.39 RADIUS Details
This page provides detailed statistics for a particular RADIUS server.
Object
Description
RADIUS Authentication Statistics
Packet Counters
Other Info
RADIUS authentication server packet counter. There are seven receive and four transmit
counters.
This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round-trip time.
RADIUS Accounting Statistics
Packet Counters
Other Info
RADIUS accounting server packet counter. There are five receive and four transmit
counters.
This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round-trip time.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clears the counters for the selected server. The "Pending Requests" counter will not be
cleared by this operation.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 240 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.40 Switch
2.4.1.41 RMON
2.4.1.42 Statistics
This page provides an overview of RMON Statistics entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries from the
Statistics table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited,
the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Statistics table. The first displayed
will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Statistics table.
Object
Description
ID
Indicates the index of Statistics entry.
Data Source(iflndex)
The port ID which wants to be monitored.
Drop
Octets
Pkts
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of
resources.
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network.
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast
packets) received.
Broad-cast
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.
Multi-cast
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including
CRC Errors
FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check
Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a
non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Under-Size
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.
Over-size
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 241 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Frag.
The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.
Jabb.
The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.
Coll.
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.
64
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length.
65~127
128~255
256~511
512~1023
1024~1588
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were from 65 to 127
octets in length.
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were from 128 to 255
octets in length.
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were from 256 to 511
octets in length.
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were from 512 to 1023
octets in length.
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were from 1024 to 1588
octets in length.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Statistics table, i.e. the entry with the
lowest ID.
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 242 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.43 History
This page provides an overview of RMON History entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries from the
History table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the
web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the History table. The first displayed will be
the one with the lowest History Index and Sample Index found in the History table.
Object
Description
History Index
Indicates the index of History control entry.
Sample Index
Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry.
Sample Start
The value of sysUpTime at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured.
Drop
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources.
Octets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network.
Pkts
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets)
received.
Broadcast
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.
Multicast
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS
CRCErrors
octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of
octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.
Oversize
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.
Frag.
The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.
Jabb.
The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.
Coll.
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.
Utilization
33710 Rev. A
The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this
sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent.
https://www.transition.com
Page 243 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Updates the table starting from the first entry in the History table (i.e., the entry with the lowest
History Index and Sample Index).
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 244 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.44 Alarm
This page provides an overview of RMON Alarm entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Alarm
table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web
page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Alarm table. The first displayed will be the
one with the lowest ID found in the Alarm table.
Object
ID
Interval
Variable
Sample Type
Description
Indicates the index of Alarm control entry.
Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling
threshold.
Indicates the particular variable to be sampled.
The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared
against the thresholds.
Value
The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.
Startup Alarm
The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid.
Rising Threshold
Rising threshold value.
Rising Index
Rising event index.
Falling Threshold
Falling threshold value.
Falling Index
Falling event index.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Updates the table starting from the first entry, i.e. the entry with the lowest ID.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 245 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
2.4.1.45 Event
This page provides an overview of RMON Event table entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries from the
Event table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the
web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Event table. The first displayed will be
the one with the lowest Event Index and Log Index found in the Event table.
Object
Description
Event Index
Indicates the index of the event entry.
Log Index
Indicates the index of the log entry.
Log Time
Indicates the time and date of the Event.
LogDescription
Indicates the Event description.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Event Table, i.e. the entry with the
lowest Event Index and Log Index.
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 246 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.46 LACP
2.4.1.47 System Status
This page provides a status overview for all LACP instances.
Object
Aggr ID
Description
The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance. For LLAG the ID is shown
as 'isid:aggr-id' and for GLAGs as 'aggr-id'
Partner System ID
The system ID (MAC address) of the aggregation partner.
Partner Key
The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID.
Partner Prio
The priority for this aggregation.
Last Changed
The time since this aggregation changed.
Local Ports
Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically. every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 247 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.48 Port Status
This page provides a status overview for LACP status for all ports.
Object
Port
Description
The switch port number.
'Yes' means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up. 'No' means that LACP is not
LACP
enabled or that the port link is down. 'Backup' means that the port could not join the
aggregation group but will join if other port leaves. Meanwhile it's LACP status is disabled.
Key
The key assigned to this port. Only ports with the same key can aggregate together.
Aggr ID
The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group.
Partner System ID
The partner's System ID (MAC address).
Partner Port
The partner's port number connected to this port.
Partner Prio
The partner's port priority.
Buttons
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 248 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.49 Port Statistics
This page provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports.
Object
Description
Port
The switch port number.
LACP Received
Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port.
LACP Transmitted
Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port.
Discarded
Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clears the counters for all ports.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 249 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.50 Loop Protection
This page displays the loop protection port status the ports of the switch.
Object
Description
Port
The switch port number of the logical port.
Action
The currently configured port action (Log Only, or Shutdown + Log or Shutdown).
Transmit
The currently configured port transmit mode (Enabled or Disabled).
Loops
The number of loops detected on this port.
Status
The current loop protection status of the port (Up or Down).
Loop
Whether a loop is currently detected on the port.
Time of Last Loop
The time of the last loop event detected.
Buttons
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 250 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.51 Spanning Tree
2.4.1.52 Bridge Status
This page provides a status overview of all STP bridge instances.
Object
MSTI
Description
The Bridge Instance. This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status (shown on the
next page).
Bridge ID
The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance.
Root ID
The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge.
Root Port
The switch port currently assigned the root port role.
Root Cost
Root Path Cost. For the Root Bridge it is zero. For all other Bridges, it is the sum of the
Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge.
Topology Flag
The current state of the Topology Change Flag of this Bridge instance.
Topology Change Last
The time since last Topology Change occurred.
Buttons
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 251 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
STP Detailed Bridge Status Example
Click on a linked MSTI instance to display this page (see “Bridge Status” above).
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 252 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.53 Port Status
This page displays the STP CIST port status for physical ports of the switch.
Object
Port
CIST Role
CIST State
Uptime
Description
The switch port number of the logical STP port.
The current STP port role of the CIST port. The port role can be one of the following
values: AlternatePort BackupPort RootPort DesignatedPort Disabled.
The current STP port state of the CIST port. The port state can be one of the following
values: Discarding Learning Forwarding.
The time since the bridge port was last initialized.
Buttons
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 253 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.54 Port Statistics
This page displays the STP port statistics counters of bridge ports in the switch.
Object
Description
Port
The switch port number of the logical STP port.
MSTP
The number of MSTP BPDU's received / transmitted on the port.
RSTP
The number of RSTP BPDU's received / transmitted on the port.
STP
The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.
TCN
The number of (legacy) Topology Change Notification BPDU's received / transmitted on
the port.
Discarded Unknown
The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded) on the port.
Discarded Illegal
The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded) on the port.
Buttons
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Click to reset the counters.
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 254 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.55 MVR
2.4.1.56 MVR Statistics
This page provides MVR Statistics information.
Object
Description
VLAN ID
The Multicast VLAN ID.
IGMP/MLD Queries Received
The number of Received Queries for IGMP and MLD, respectively.
IGMP/MLD Queries
Transmitted
IGMPv1 Joins Received
IGMPv2/MLDv1 Reports
Received
IGMPv3/MLDv2 Reports
Received
IGMPv2/MLDv1 Leaves
Received
The number of Transmitted Queries for IGMP and MLD, respectively.
The number of Received IGMPv1 Joins.
The number of Received IGMPv2 Joins and MLDv1 Reports, respectively.
The number of Received IGMPv1 Joins and MLDv2 Reports, respectively.
The number of Received IGMPv2 Leaves and MLDv1 Dones, respectively.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clears all Statistics counters.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 255 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.57 MVR Channel Groups
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR Group table, default being 20, selected through the
"entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the
beginning of the MVR Channels (Groups) Information Table. The "Start from VLAN", and "Group Address"
input fields lets you select the starting point in the MVR Channels (Groups) Information Table. Click the
Refresh button to update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MVR Channels (Groups)
Information Table match. In addition, the two input fields will - upon a Refresh button click - assume the
value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The >> button will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup. When
the end is reached the text "No more entries" displays in the table. Use the |<< button to start over.
Object
Description
VLAN ID
VLAN ID of the group.
Groups
Group ID of the group displayed.
Port Members
Ports under this group.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.
Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR Channels (Groups) Information
table.
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 256 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.58 MVR SFM Information
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR SFM Information Table, default being 20, selected
through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries
from the beginning of the MVR SFM Information Table. The "Start from VLAN", and "Group Address" input
fields lets you select the starting point in the MVR SFM Information Table. Click the Refresh button to
update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MVR SFM Information Table match. In
addition, the two input fields will - upon a Refresh button click - assume the value of the first displayed
entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address. The >> button will use the last entry of
the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more
entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the|<< button to start over.
Object
Description
VLAN ID
VLAN ID of the group.
Group
Group address of the group displayed.
Port
Switch port number.
Mode
Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group Address)
basis. It can be either Include or Exclude.
IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source
Source Address
addresses for filtering to be 128. When there is no any source filtering address, the text
"None" is shown in the Source Address field.
Type
Hardware Filter/Switch
33710 Rev. A
Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.
Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source
IPv4/IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not.
https://www.transition.com
Page 257 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.
Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR SFM Information Table.
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 258 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.59 IPMC
2.4.1.60 IGMP Snooping
2.4.1.61 IGMP Snooping Status
This page provides IGMP Snooping status.
Object
Description
VLAN ID
The VLAN ID of the entry.
Querier Version
Working Querier Version currently.
Host Version
Working Host Version currently.
Querier Status
Shows the Querier status is "ACTIVE" or "IDLE".
"DISABLE" denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled.
Querier Transmitted
The number of Transmitted Queries.
Queries Received
The number of Received Queries.
V1 Report Received
The number of Received V1 Reports.
V2 Report Received
The number of Received V2 Reports.
V3 Report Received
The number of Received V3 Reports.
V2 Leaves Received
The number of Received V2 Leaves.
Router Port
33710 Rev. A
Display which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that
leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier.
https://www.transition.com
Page 259 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port.
Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port.
Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port.
Port
Switch port number.
Status
Indicate whether specific port is a router port or not.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clears all Statistics counters.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 260 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.62 Groups Information
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP Group table, default being 20, selected through the
"entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the
beginning of the IGMP Group Table. The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields lets you select the
starting point in the IGMP Group Table. Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting
from that or the closest next IGMP Group Table match. Also, the two input fields will - upon a Refresh button
click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start
address. The >> button will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup.
When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the |<< button to start over.
Object
Description
VLAN ID
VLAN ID of the group.
Groups
Group address of the group displayed.
Port Members
Ports under this group.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.
Updates the table, starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table.
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 261 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.63 IPv4 SFM Information
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP SFM Information table, default being 20, selected
through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries
from the beginning of the IGMP SFM Information Table.
The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields lets you select the starting point in the IGMP SFM
Information Table. Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the
closest next IGMP SFM Information Table match. In addition, the two input fields will - upon a Refresh
button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same
start address. The >> button will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next
lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the |<< button to start over.
Object
Description
VLAN ID
VLAN ID of the group.
Group
Group address of the group displayed.
Port
Switch port number.
Mode
Source Address
Type
Hardware Filter/Switch
33710 Rev. A
Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group Address)
basis. It can be either Include or Exclude.
IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source
addresses for filtering to be 128.
Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.
Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source
IPv4 address could be handled by chip or not.
https://www.transition.com
Page 262 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.
Updates the table starting from the first entry in the IGMP SFM Information Table.
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 263 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.64 MLD Snooping
2.4.1.65 MLD Snooping Status
This page provides MLD Snooping status.
Object
Description
VLAN ID
The VLAN ID of the entry.
Querier Version
Working Querier Version currently.
Host Version
Working Host Version currently.
Querier Status
Shows the Querier status as "ACTIVE" or "IDLE".
"DISABLE" denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled.
Queries Transmitted
The number of Transmitted Queries.
Queries Received
The number of Received Queries.
V1 Report Received
The number of Received V1 Reports.
V2 Report Received
The number of Received V2 Reports.
V1 Leaves Received
The number of Received V1 Leaves.
Display which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that
Router Port
leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier.
Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port.
Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 264 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port.
Port
Switch port number.
status
Indicate whether specific port is a router port or not.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clears all Statistics counters.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 265 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.66 Groups Information
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table, default being 20, selected through the
"entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the
beginning of the MLD Group Table.
The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields lets you select the starting point in the MLD Group Table.
Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MLD
Group Table match. In addition, the two input fields will - upon a Refresh button click - assume the value
of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The >> button will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup. When
the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the |<< button to start
over.
Object
Description
VLAN ID
VLAN ID of the group.
Groups
Group address of the group displayed.
Port Members
Ports under this group.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.
Updates the table, starting with the first entry in the MLD Group Table.
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 266 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.67 IPv6 SFM Information
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD SFM Information table, default being 20, selected through
the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the
beginning of the MLD SFM Information Table.
The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields lets you select the starting point in the MLD SFM
Information Table. Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the
closest next MLD SFM Information Table match. In addition, the two input fields will - upon a Refresh
button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same
start address. The >> button will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next
lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the |<<
button to start over.
Object
Description
VLAN ID
VLAN ID of the group.
Group
Group address of the group displayed.
Port
Switch port number.
Mode
Source Address
Type
Hardware Filter/Switch
33710 Rev. A
Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group Address)
basis. It can be either Include or Exclude.
IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source
addresses for filtering to be 128.
Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.
Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source
IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not.
https://www.transition.com
Page 267 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields..
Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MLD SFM Information Table.
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 268 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.68 LLDP
2.4.1.69 Neighbors
This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors. The displayed table contains a row for each
port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected.
Object
Description
Local Port
The port on which the LLDP frame was received.
Chassis ID
The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor's LLDP frames.
Port ID
The Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port.
Port Description
Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit.
System Name
System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit.
System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit's capabilities, including:
1. Other
2. Repeater
3. Bridge
4. WLAN Access Point
System Capabilities
5. Router
6. Telephone
7. DOCSIS cable device
8. Station only
9. Reserved
When a capability is enabled, the capability is followed by (+). If the capability is
disabled, the capability is followed by (-).
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 269 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Management Address is the neighbor unit's address that is used for higher layer
Management Address
entities to assist discovery by the network management. This could for instance hold the
neighbor's IP address.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 270 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.70 LLDP-MED Neighbors
This page provides a status overview of all LLDP-MED neighbors. The displayed table contains a row for
each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected. This function applies to VoIP devices which support
LLDP-MED.
Object
Port
Description
The port on which the LLDP frame was received.
LLDP-MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types: Network
Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices.
LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device Definition
LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Devices, as defined in TIA-1057, provide access to
the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP-MED Endpoint Devices. An
LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the
following technologies:
1. LAN Switch/Router
2. IEEE 802.1 Bridge
Device Type
3. IEEE 802.3 Repeater (included for historical reasons)
4. IEEE 802.11 Wireless Access Point
5. Any device that supports the IEEE 802.1AB and MED extensions defined by
TIA-1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method.
LLDP-MED Endpoint Device Definition
LLDP-MED Endpoint Devices, as defined in TIA-1057, are located at the IEEE 802
LAN network edge, and participate in IP communication service using the LLDP-MED
framework.
Within the LLDP-MED Endpoint Device category, the LLDP-MED scheme is broken
into further Endpoint Device Classes, as defined in the following.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 271 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Each LLDP-MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities
defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class. For-example will any LLDP-MED
Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint (Class II) also support all
aspects of TIA-1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints (Class I), and any LLDP-MED
Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device (Class III) will also
support all aspects of TIA-1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints (Class II) and
Generic Endpoints (Class I).
LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I)
The LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I) definition is applicable to all endpoint
products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA-1057, however
do not support IP media or act as an end-user communication appliance. Such
devices may include (but are not limited to) IP Communication Controllers, other
communication related servers, or any device requiring basic services as defined in
TIA-1057.
Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration, device location,
network policy, power management, and inventory management.
LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II)
The LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II) definition is applicable to all endpoint
products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with
a particular end user. Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the
previous Generic Endpoint Class (Class I), and are extended to include aspects
related to media streaming. Example product categories expected to adhere to this
class include (but are not limited to) Voice / Media Gateways, Conference Bridges,
Media Servers, and similar.
Discovery services defined in this class include media-type-specific network layer
policy discovery.
LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III)
The LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III) definition is applicable to all
endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP
media. Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic
Endpoint (Class I) and Media Endpoint (Class II) classes, and are extended to include
aspects related to end user devices. Example product categories expected to adhere
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 272 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
to this class include (but are not limited to) end user communication appliances, such
as IP Phones, PC-based softphones, or other communication appliances that directly
support the end user.
Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier
(including ECS / E911 information), embedded L2 switch support, inventory
management.
LLDP-MED Capabilities describes the neighbor unit's LLDP-MED capabilities. The
possible capabilities are:
1. LLDP-MED capabilities
2. Network Policy
LLDP-MED Capabilities
3. Location Identification
4. Extended Power via MDI - PSE
5. Extended Power via MDI - PD
6. Inventory
7. Reserved
Application Type indicating the primary function of the application(s) defined for this
network policy, advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device. The
possible application types are shown below.
1. Voice - for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances
supporting interactive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a
separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data
applications.
2. Voice Signalling - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the
Application Type
voice signalling than for the voice media.
3. Guest Voice - to support a separate limited feature-set voice service for guest users
and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances
supporting interactive voice services.
4. Guest Voice Signalling - for use in network topologies that require a different policy
for the guest voice signalling than for the guest voice media.
5. Softphone Voice - for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices,
such as PCs or laptops.
6. Video Conferencing - for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 273 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
other similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.
7. Streaming Video - for use by broadcast or multicast based video content
distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that
require specific network policy treatment. Video applications relying on TCP with
buffering would not be an intended use of this application type.
8. Video Signalling - for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for
the video signalling than for the video media.
Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy is
required by the device. Can be either Defined or Unknown:
Policy
Unknown: The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown.
Defined: The network policy is defined.
TAG is indicative of whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an
untagged VLAN. Can be Tagged or Untagged.
TAG
Untagged: The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not
include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.
Tagged: The device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format.
VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003. A
value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID. A value of 0 (Priority
VLAN ID
Tagged) is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE
802.1Q-2003, meaning that only the IEEE 802.1D priority level is significant and the
default PVID of the ingress port is used instead.
Priority
Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type. One of the
eight priority levels (0 through 7).
DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the
DSCP
specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474. Contain one of 64 code point
values (0 through 63).
Auto-negotiation
Auto-negotiation status
33710 Rev. A
Auto-negotiation identifies if MAC/PHY auto-negotiation is supported by the link
partner.
Auto-negotiation status identifies if auto-negotiation is currently enabled at the link
partner. If Auto-negotiation is supported and Auto-negotiation status is disabled,
https://www.transition.com
Page 274 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
the 802.3 PMD operating mode will be determined the operational MAU type field
value rather than by auto-negotiation.
Auto-negotiation
Capabilities
Auto-negotiation Capabilities shows the link partners MAC/PHY capabilities.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 275 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.71 EEE
By using EEE power savings can be achieved at the expense of traffic latency. This latency occurs due to the fact
that the circuits EEE turn off to save power; they need time to boot up before sending traffic over the link.
This time is called "wakeup time". To achieve minimal latency, devices can use LLDP to exchange information
about their respective TX and RX "wakeup time", as a way to agree upon the minimum wakeup time they need.
This page provides an overview of EEE information exchanged by LLDP.
Object
Local Port
Tx Tw
Rx Tw
Description
The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted.
The link partner's maximum time that transmit path can hold-off sending data after deassertion
of LPI.
The link partner's time that receiver would like the transmitter to hold-off to allow time for the
receiver to wake from sleep.
The link partner's fallback receive Tw. A receiving link partner may inform the transmitter of an
alternate desired Tw_sys_tx. Since a receiving link partner is likely to have discrete levels for
Fallback Receive Tw
savings, this provides the transmitter with additional information that it may use for a more
efficient allocation. Systems that do not implement this option default the value to be the same
as that of the Receive Tw_sys_tx.
The link partner's Echo Tx Tw value. The respective echo values will be defined as the local link
partner’s reflection (echo) of the remote link partners respective values. When a local link
partner receives its echoed values from the remote link partner it can determine whether or not
Echo Tx Tw
the remote link partner has received, registered and processed its most recent values. For
example, if the local link partner receives echoed parameters that do not match the values in its
local MIB, then the local link partner infers that the remote link partners request was based on
stale information.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 276 of 328
Transition Networks
Echo Rx Tw
Resolved Tx Tw
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
The link partner's Echo Rx Tw value.
The resolved Tx Tw for this link. Note: NOT the link partner. The resolved value that is the
actual "tx wakeup time” used for this link (based on EEE information exchanged via LLDP).
The resolved Rx Tw for this link. Note : NOT the link partner.
Resolved Rx Tw
The resolved value that is the actual "tx wakeup time” used for this link (based on EEE
information exchanged via LLDP).
Shows whether the switch and the link partner have agreed on wake times.
EEE in Sync
Red - Switch and link partner have not agreed on wakeup times.
Green - Switch and link partner have agreed on wakeup times.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 277 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.72 Port Statistics
This page provides an overview of all LLDP traffic. Two types of counters are shown. Global counters are
counters that refer to the whole switch, while local counters refer to per port counters for the currently
selected switch.
Object
Description
Global Counters
Neighbor entries were last
Shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added. It also shows the time
change
elapsed since the last change was detected.
Total Neighbors Entries
Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot.
Added
Total Neighbors Entries
Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot.
Deleted
Total Neighbors Entries
Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to the entry table being full.
Dropped
Total Neighbors Entries
Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time-To-Live expiring.
Aged Out
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 278 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Local Counters
Local Port
The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted.
Tx Frames
The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port.
Rx Frames
The number of LLDP frames received on the port.
Rx Errors
The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error.
If a LLDP frame is received on a port, and the switch's internal table has run full, the
LLDP frame is counted and discarded. This situation is known as "Too Many
Frames Discarded
Neighbors" in the LLDP standard. LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when
the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table. Entries are
removed from the table when a given port's link is down, an LLDP shutdown frame is
received, or when the entry ages out.
TLVs Discarded
TLVs Unrecognized
Org. Discarded
Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information, known as TLVs (TLV is
short for "Type Length Value"). If a TLV is malformed, it is counted and discarded.
The number of well-formed TLVs, but with an unknown type value.
If LLDP frame is received with an organizationally TLV, but the TLV is not supported
the TLV is discarded and counted.
Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is
Age-Outs
valid (age-out time). If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time, the
LLDP information is removed, and the Age-Out counter is incremented.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clears the local counters immediately. All counters (including global counters) are
cleared upon reboot.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 279 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.73 MAC Table
Each page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table, default being 20, selected through the "entries
per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of
the MAC Table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address
found in the MAC Table.
The "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields let you select the starting point in the MAC Table.
Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MAC
Table match. In addition, the two input fields will - upon a Refresh button click - assume the value of the
first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The >> button will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN/MAC address pairs as a basis for the
next lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the |<< button to start over.
Object
Description
Type
Indicates whether the entry is a static or a dynamic entry.
MAC Address
The MAC address of the entry.
VLAN
The VLAN ID of the entry.
Port Members
The ports that are members of the entry.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN"
input fields.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 280 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Flushes all dynamic entries.
Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table, i.e. the entry with the
lowest VLAN ID and MAC address.
Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 281 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.74 VLANs
2.4.1.75 VLANs Membership
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table (the default is 20), selected through the "entries
per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of
the VLAN Table. The first VLAN displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table.
The "Start from VLAN" input field lets you select the starting point in the VLAN Table.
Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next VLAN
Table match.
The >> button will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN entry as a basis for the next lookup.
When the end is reached, the text "No data exists for the selected user" is shown in the table.
Use the |<< button to start over.
Object
Description
Various internal software modules may use VLAN services to configure VLAN memberships
on the fly. The drop-down list on the right allows for selecting between showing VLAN
VLAN User
memberships as configured by an administrator (Admin) or as configured by one of these
internal software modules (e.g., Combined, Admin, NAS, GVRP, MVR, Voice VLAN)).
The "Combined" entry will show a combination of the administrator and internal software
modules configuration, and basically reflects what is actually configured in hardware.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 282 of 328
Transition Networks
VLAN ID
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
VLAN ID for which the Port members are displayed.
A row of icons (image)s for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID.
The image
Port Members
displays if a port is included in a VLAN.
The image
displays if a port is in the forbidden port list.
The image
displays if a port is in the forbidden port list and at the same time attempted
included in the VLAN, the following image will be displayed. The port will not be a member of
the VLAN in this case.
The image
displays if a port is not VLAN configured.
Buttons
Select VLAN Users from this drop down list.
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 283 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.76 VLANs Ports
This page provides VLAN Port Status.
Object
Description
Various internal software modules may use VLAN services to configure VLAN port
configuration on the fly.
The drop-down list on the right allows for selecting between showing VLAN memberships as
configured by an administrator (Admin) or as configured by one of these internal software
VLAN User
modules.
The "Combined" entry will show a combination of the administrator and internal software
modules configuration, and basically reflects what is actually configured in hardware.
If a given software modules hasn't overridden any of the port settings, the text "No data
exists for the selected user" is shown in the table.
Port
Port Type
Ingress Filtering
Frame Type
Port VALN ID
Tx Tag
33710 Rev. A
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Shows the port type (Unaware, C-Port, S-Port, S-Custom-Port.) that a given user wants to
configure on the port. The field is empty if not overridden by the selected user.
Shows whether a given user wants ingress filtering enabled or not.
The field is empty if not overridden by the selected user.
Shows the acceptable frame types (All, Tagged, Untagged) that a given user wants to
configure on the port. The field is empty if not overridden by the selected user.
Shows the Port VLAN ID (PVID) that a given user wants the port to have.
The field is empty if not overridden by the selected user.
Shows the Tx Tag requirements (Tag All, Tag PVID, Tag UVID, Untag All, Untag PVID, Untag
https://www.transition.com
Page 284 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
UVID) that a given user has on a port. The field is empty if not overridden by the selected
user.
If Tx Tag is overridden by the selected user and is set to Tag or Untag UVID, then this field
Untagged VLAN ID
will show the VLAN ID that you want to tag or untag on egress. The field is empty if not
overridden by the selected user.
Two users may have conflicting requirements to a port's configuration. For instance, one
user may require all frames to be tagged on egress while another requires all frames to be
untagged on egress.
Since both users cannot win, this gives rise to a conflict, which is solved in a prioritized way.
Conflicts
The Administrator has the least priority. Other software modules are prioritized according to
their position in the drop-down list: The higher in the list, the higher priority.
If conflicts exist, it will be displayed as "Yes" for the "Combined" user and the offending
software module.
The "Combined" user reflects what is actually configured in hardware.
Buttons
Select VLAN Users from this drop down list (Combined, Admin, NAS, GVRP, MVR, Voice
VLAN, MSTP, and VCL).
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 285 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.77 VCL
2.4.1.78 MAC-Based VLAN
This page shows MAC-based VLAN entries configured by various MAC-based VLAN users.
The following VLAN User types are currently supported:
Static: Refers to CLI/Web/SNMP VLAN user types.
NAS: NAS provides port-based authentication, which involves communications between a Supplicant, an
Authenticator, and an Authentication Server.
Combined: Displays the status of all of the User types.
Object
Description
MAC Address
Indicates the MAC address.
VLAN ID
Indicates the VLAN ID.
Port Members
Port members of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Refreshes the displayed table.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 286 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.79 sFlow
This page shows receiver and per-port sFlow statistics.
Object
Description
Receiver Statistics
This field shows the current owner of the sFlow configuration. It assumes one of three
values as follows:
• If sFlow is currently unconfigured/unclaimed, Owner contains <none>.
Owner
• If sFlow is currently configured through Web or CLI, Owner contains <Configured
through local management>.
• If sFlow is currently configured through SNMP, Owner contains a string identifying
the sFlow receiver.
IP Address/Hostname
Timeout
Tx Successes
The IP address or hostname of the sFlow receiver.
The number of seconds remaining before sampling stops and the current sFlow
owner is released.
The number of UDP datagrams successfully sent to the sFlow receiver.
The number of UDP datagrams that has failed transmission.
Tx Errors
The most common source of errors is invalid sFlow receiver IP/hostname
configuration. To diagnose, paste the receiver's IP address/hostname into the Ping
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 287 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Web page (Diagnostics > Ping/Ping6).
Flow Samples
The total number of flow samples sent to the sFlow receiver.
Counter Samples
The total number of counter samples sent to the sFlow receiver.
Port Statistics
Port
The port number for which the following statistics applies.
The number of flow samples sent to the sFlow receiver originating from this port.
Here, flow samples are divided into Rx and Tx flow samples, where Rx flow samples
Rx and Tx Flow Samples
contains the number of packets that were sampled upon reception (ingress) on the
port and Tx flow samples contains the number of packets that were sampled upon
transmission (egress) on the port.
Counter Samples
The total number of counter samples sent to the sFlow receiver originating from this
port.
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clears the sFlow receiver counters.
Clears the per-port counters.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 288 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.80 Redundant Ring & Chain Monitoring
This page provides a status overview for all of Ring or Chain status. Ring or Chain configuration is done at
the Configuration > Redundant Ring&Chain menu path. The screen below shows no ring or chain enabled.
The screen below shows a ring configured but no chain configured.
Object
Description
Group Index
The group index. This parameter is used to easily identify the ring group (1, 2, 3).
Mode
Indicates whether the group is enabled or disabled.
Role
Indicates group is configured as which role (e.g., Ring(Slave) or Chain(Member)).
Displays "Normal" when ring is complete.
State
Displays “--“ when no ring or chain is configured.
Displays "Fail" when ring is incomplete (at least one link is down),.
Ring Port(s)
Describes current status of ring port(s). For example, “Port-1(Forward Port, Link
Up, Forwarded)” or “Port-2(Forward Port, Link Down)”.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 289 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
The screen below shows a chain configured but no ring configured.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 290 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.81 DDMI Monitoring
2.4.1.82 Overview
The Monitor > DDMI > Overview page provides global Digital Diagnostic Monitoring Interface (DDMI)
information.
Note that DDMI must be enabled at the Configuration > DDMI page for DDMI monitoring to function.
Object
Port
Description
The DDMI port number. Click to display the port’s detailed information (see the
next section below).
Vendor
Indicates Vendor name SFP vendor name (e.g., Transition).
Part Number
Indicates Vendor Part number (PN) provided by SFP vendor (e.g., TN-SFP-SXD).
Serial Number
Indicates Vendor Serial number (SN) provided by vendor (e.g., 8672105).
Revision
Indicates Vendor Revision level (rev ) for part number provided by vendor (e.g.,
0000).
Date Code
Indicates Date code Vendor's manufacturing date code (e.g., 2009-10-27).
Transceiver
Indicates Transceiver compatibility (e.g., 1000BASE_SX).
Buttons
Check this box to refresh the page automatically every 3 seconds.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 291 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.4.1.83 Detailed
The Monitoring > DDMI > Detailed page displays detailed SFP Transceiver and DDMI information.
Object
Description
Transceiver Information
Vendor
Indicates Vendor name SFP vendor name (e.g., Transition).
Part Number
Indicates Vendor Part number (PN) provided by SFP vendor (e.g., TN-SFP-SXD).
Serial Number
Indicates Vendor Serial number (SN) provided by vendor (e.g., 8672105).
Revision
Indicates Vendor Revision level (rev) for the part number provided by vendor (e.g.,
0000).
Date Code
Indicates Date code Vendor's manufacturing date code (e.g., 2009-10-27).
Transceiver
Indicates Transceiver compatibility (e.g., 1000BASE_SX).
DDMI Information
Current
The current value of temperature, voltage, TX bias, TX power, and RX power.
High Alarm
The high alarm threshold value of temperature, voltage, TX bias, TX power, and RX
Threshold
power.
High Warn
The high warn threshold value of temperature, voltage, TX bias, TX power, and RX
Threshold
power.
Low Warn
The low warn threshold value of temperature, voltage, TX bias, TX power, and RX
Threshold
power.
Low Alarm
The low alarm threshold value of temperature, voltage, TX bias, TX power, and RX
Threshold
power.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 292 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.5 Diagnostics
2.5.1.1
Ping
This page lets you issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues.
1.
Navigate to Diagnostics > Ping.
2.
Enter the desired IP Address, Ping Length, Ping Count, and Ping Interval.
3.
Click the Start button.
4.
Observe the ICMP Ping Output:
The Ping parameters are described below:
Object
Description
IP Address
The destination IP Address.
Ping Length
The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes.
Ping Count
The count of the ICMP packet. Values range from 1 time to 60 times.
Ping Interval
The interval of the ICMP packet. Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 293 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Buttons
Click to start transmitting ICMP packets.
Click to re-start diagnostics with PING.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 294 of 328
Transition Networks
2.5.1.2
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Ping6
This page lets you issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues.
1.
Navigate to Diagnostics > Ping6.
2.
Enter the desired IP Address, Ping Length, Ping Count, Ping Interval, and Egress Interface.
3.
Click the Start button.
4.
Observe the ICMPv6 Ping Output:
Object
IP Address
Description
The destination IPv6 Address. Must be a valid IPv6 address in 128-bit records represented as
eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon (:) separating each field.
Ping Length
The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes.
Ping Count
The count of the ICMP packet. Values range from 1 time to 60 times.
Ping Interval
The interval of the ICMP packet. Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds.
Egress Interface
The VLAN ID (VID) of the specific egress IPv6 interface which ICMP packet goes.
(only for IPv6)
The given VID ranges from 1 to 4094 and will be effective only when the corresponding IPv6
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 295 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
interface is valid.
When an egress interface is not given, PING6 finds the best match interface for destination.
Do not specify egress interface for loopback address.
Do specify egress interface for link-local or multicast address.
Buttons
Click to start transmitting ICMP packets.
Click to re-start diagnostics with PING.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 296 of 328
Transition Networks
2.5.1.3
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
VeriPHY
This page lets you run the VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics for 10/100 and 1G copper ports.
1. Navigate to the Diagnostics > Verify menu path.
2. At the Port dropdown, select All ports or individual ports (e.g., 1-8).
3. Click the Start button to run the cable diagnostics. The message “VeriPhy is running...” displays
momentarily. This will take approximately 5 seconds. If All ports are selected, this can take
approximately 15 seconds.
4. When completed, the page refreshes automatically; view the cable diagnostics results in the Cable
Status table:
Note that VeriPHY is only accurate for cables of length 7 - 140 meters. The 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be
linked down while running VeriPHY. Therefore, running VeriPHY on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port
will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 297 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
The Cable Status table parameters are described below:
Object
Port
Description
The copper port(s) on which you are requesting VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics (ports 1-8).
Port: Port number.
Pair: The status of the cable pair.
OK - Correctly terminated pair
Open - Open pair
Short - Shorted pair
Abnormal - incorrect termination
Short A - Cross-pair short to pair A
Cable Status
Short B - Cross-pair short to pair B
Short C - Cross-pair short to pair C
Short D - Cross-pair short to pair D
Cross A - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair A
Cross B - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair B
Cross C - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair C
Cross D - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair D
Length: The length (in meters) of the cable pair. The resolution is 3 meters
Buttons
Click to run the diagnostics.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 298 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.6 Maintenance
The Maintenance menu lets you perform restart, reset to factory defaults, software,
and Configuration functions.
2.6.1.1
Restart Device
You can restart the switch from this page. After restart, the switch will boot normally.
Buttons
Click Yes to restart the device. The System Information page displays.
Click No to return to the Port State page without restarting.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 299 of 328
Transition Networks
2.6.1.2
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Factory Default
This page lets you reset the switch configuration to its factory default settings. Only the IP configuration is
retained. The new configuration is available immediately, so no restart is necessary.
Buttons
Click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults.
Click to return to the Port State Overview page without resetting the configuration.
When done, the message “Configuration Factory Reset Done The configuration has been
reset. The new configuration is available immediately.” displays.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 300 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.6.1.3
Software
2.6.1.4
Software Upload
The Maintenance > Software > Upload page lets you update the switch firmware.
Buttons
Browse to and select the software image file and click the Upload button.
After selecting the software image, click the Upload button to update firmware.
After the software image is uploaded, a page announces that the firmware update is
initiated. After about a minute, the firmware is updated and the switch restarts.
Message: Firmware update in progress. The uploaded firmware image is being transferred to flash.
The system will restart after the update. Until then, do not reset or power off the device!
The System Information page displays when the firmware upgrade (Software Upload) is complete.
Verify that the Software Version displayed is as expected.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 301 of 328
Transition Networks
2.6.1.5
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Image Select
This page provides information about the active and alternate (backup) firmware images in the device, and lets
you revert to the alternate image. The web page displays two tables with information about the active and
alternate firmware images. Note:
1. In case the active firmware image is the alternate image, only the "Active Image" table is shown. In this
case, the Activate Alternate Image button is also disabled.
2. If the alternate image is active (due to a corruption of the primary image or by manual intervention),
uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use the primary image and activate this.
3. The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware releases. This does not
constitute an error.
Object
Description
The flash index name of the firmware image. The name of the Active Image is managed,
Image
the Alternate Image is named managed.bk.
Version
The version of the firmware image.
Date
The date and time when the firmware was produced.
Buttons
Click to use the alternate image. This button may be disabled depending on system
state.
Cancel activating the backup image. Navigates away from this page.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 302 of 328
Transition Networks
2.6.1.6
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Configuration
The Configuration menu lets you perform Save startup-config, Download Configuration,
Upload Configuration, Activate Configuration, and Delete Configuration File functions.
System Files
The switch stores its configuration in a number of text files in CLI format. The files are either virtual (RAM-based)
or stored in flash on the switch. The three system files are:
running-config
startup-config
default-config
A virtual file that represents the currently active configuration on the switch.
This file is volatile.
The startup configuration for the switch, read at boot time.
A read-only file with vendor-specific configuration. This file is read when the
system is restored to default settings.
It is also possible to store up to two other files and apply them to the running-config file, thereby switching
configuration.
2.6.1.7
Save startup-config
This copies running-config to startup-config, thereby ensuring that the currently active configuration will be
used at the next reboot.
During a Save Running Configuration to startup-config, the generation of the configuration file may be time
consuming, depending on the amount of non-default configuration.
When done, the message startup-config saved successfully displays.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 303 of 328
Transition Networks
2.6.1.8
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Download Configuration
You can download any of the switch files to the web browser. Select a File Name and click the Download
Configuration button. Downloading the running-config file may take a while to complete; the file must be
prepared for download.
If a prompt displays like “Do you want to save startup-config (1.48 KB) from 192.168.1.77” displays, select Save,
Save As, or Cancel, and continue operation.
The file is saved to the default location or to the specified location. You can open the saved file in WordPad or a
similar program.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 304 of 328
Transition Networks
2.6.1.9
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Upload Configuration
You can upload a file from the web browser to all the files on the switch, except default-config, which is
read-only. Browse to and select the file to upload, select the destination file on the target, then click the
Upload Configuration button.
If the destination is running-config, the file will be applied to the switch configuration. This can be done in
two ways:
Replace mode: The current configuration is fully replaced with the configuration in the uploaded file.
Merge mode: The uploaded file is merged into running-config.
If the file system is full (i.e., contains the three system files mentioned above plus two other files), it is not
possible to create new files, but an existing file must be overwritten or another deleted first.
When done, the message “Upload successfully completed” displays.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 305 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.6.1.10 Activate Configuration
It is possible to activate any of the configuration files present on the switch, except for running-config which
represents the currently active configuration.
Select the file to activate (default-config or startup-config) and click the Activate Configuration button.
This will initiate the process of completely replacing the existing configuration with that of the selected file.
The previous configuration will be completely replaced, potentially leading to loss of management
connectivity.
Note: The activated configuration file will not be saved to startup-config automatically.
Note: When activating new configuration, if the configuration changes IP settings, management
connectivity may be lost.
When done, the messages “Status Activation completed successfully.” and “(No output was generated.)”
display.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 306 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
2.6.1.11 Delete Configuration File
You can delete any of the writable files stored in flash, including startup-config. If this is done and the switch
is rebooted without a prior Save operation, this effectively resets the switch to its default configuration.
Select the file to delete and click the Delete Configuration File button.
At the confirmation prompt, click the OK button to continue or click the Cancel button to quit.
The message “newFileToUpload successfully deleted.” displays if you clicked OK.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 307 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
3. Technical Specifications
Ethernet
Operating mode
Store and forward, L2 wire speed/non-blocking switching engine
MAC addresses
8K
Jumbo frames
9K bytes
Copper RJ45 Ports
Speed
10/100/1000 Mbps
MDI/MDIX Auto-crossover
Support straight or cross wired cables
Auto-negotiating
10/100/1000 Mbps speed auto negotiation; Full and half duplex
Ethernet isolation
1500 VRMS 1 minute
SFP (pluggable) Ports
Port types supported
Fiber port connector
Optimal fiber cable
SFP (pluggable) Ports 100/1000Base SFP slot
Support 100/1000BaseT SFP transceiver
LC typically for fiber (depends on module)
Typical 50 or 62.5/125 µm for multimode (mm);
Typical 8 or 9/125 µm for single mode (sm)
Network Redundancy
Fast failover protection rings
Link loss recovery < 20 ms
Single and multiple rings supported
Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1D STP, IEEE 802.1w RSTP, IEEE 802.1s MSTP
Port Trunk with LACP
Static trunk or Dynamic via LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol)
Bridge, VLANs & Protocols
Flow Control
IEEE 802.3x (Full Duplex) and Back-Pressure (Half Duplex)
Port-based VLANs; IEEE 802.1Q tag-based VLANs;
IEEE 802.1ad Double Tagging (Q in Q)
VLAN Types
IGMP v1, v2; IGMP Snooping and Querying
Immediate leave and leave proxy; Throttling and filtering
IEEE 802.1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 308 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Traffic Management and QoS
Priority
IEEE 802.1p QoS
Number of queues per port
8
Scheduling schemes
SPQ, WRR
Traffic Shaper
Port-based shaping
Security
Port security
IP- and MAC-based access control
Power
Power input
Redundant Input Terminals
Input voltage range
12-58 VDC
Max. power consumption
10.5W
Reverse power protection
Yes
Transient protection
> 15,000 watts peak
LED Indicators
Power Status indication
Indication of power input status
Ethernet port indication
Link and Speed
Management
CLI (Command Line Interface)
User Management Interface
Web-based Management
SNMP v1, v2c
Telnet (5 sessions)
Management Security
Upgrade and Restore
HTTPS, SSH, RADIUS client for Management
Configuration import / Export
Firmware Upgrade
Syslog
Diagnostics
Per-VLAN Mirroring
SFP with DDM (Digital Diagnostic Monitoring)
MIBs
RMON 1, 2, 3, 9; Q-Bridge MIB, RFC 1213 MIB-II, RFC 4188 Bridge
DHCP
Client, Server, Relay, Snooping, Option 82
NTP/SNTP
Yes
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 309 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Environmental & Compliance
Operating temp. range
-40 to +75 ̊C (cold startup at -40 ̊C)
Storage temp. range
-40 to +85 ̊C
Humidity (non-condensing)
5 to 95% RH
Vibration, shock & freefall
IEC68-2-6, -27, -32
Certification compliance
CE/FCC; EN50121-4
Electrical safety
CSA C22, EN61010-1, CE
EMC
FCC Part 15, CISPR 22 (EN55022) Class A
IEC 6100-4-2, -3, -4, -5, -6
RoHS and WEEE
RoHS Pb free and WEEE compliant
MTBF
> 25 years
Mechanical
Ingress protection
IP30
Installation options
DIN-Rail mount, Wall mount
Dimensions
154 mm x 109 mm x 60 mm
Weight
1056 g (2.32 lbs.)
System Statistics
Maximum System Value
VLAN IDs
4096
VLAN Limitation
1024
User Privilege Levels
15
RMON Statistics Entries
65, 535
RMON Alarm Entries
65
RMON Event Entries
65, 535
IPMC Profiles
64
IPMC Rules / Address Entries
128
ACEs
256
ICMP Types / Codes
255
RADIUS Servers
5
TACACS+ Servers
5
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 310 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
MAC-based VLAN Entries
256
IP subnet-based VLAN Entries
128
Protocol-based VLAN Groups
125
Voice VLAN OUIs
16
QCEs
256
IP Interfaces
8
IP Routes
32
Security Access Management
16
MVR VLANs
4
MAC Learning table addresses
8K
IGMP Groups
256
MIBs Supported
1.
RFC 1213: Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP/IP-based internets: MIB-II
2.
RFC 2819: Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base
3.
RFC 2863: The Interfaces Group MIB
4.
RFC 3411: An Architecture for Describing Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Management Frameworks
5.
RFC 3412: Message Processing and Dispatching for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
6.
RFC 3414: User-based Security Model (USM) for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMPv3)
7.
RFC 3415: View-based Access Control Model (VACM) for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
8.
RFC 3621: Power Ethernet MIB
9.
RFC 3635: Definitions of Managed Objects for the Ethernet-like Interface Types
10. RFC 3636: Definitions of Managed Objects for IEEE 802.3 Medium Attachment Units (MAUs)
11. RFC 4133: Entity MIB (Version 3)
12. RFC 4188: Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges
13. RFC 4292: IP Forwarding Table MIB
14. RFC 4293: Management Information Base for the Internet Protocol (IP)
15. RFC 4363: Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges with Traffic Classes, Multicast Filtering, and Virtual LAN
Extensions
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 311 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
4. Service, Warranty, and Tech Support
See the SISGM1040-184D-LRT Install Guide for related information.
5. Compliance Information
See the SISGM1040-184D-LRT Install Guide for related information.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 312 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Glossary
A
ACE
An ACE ( Access Control Entry) describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID. There are three ACE frame
types (Ethernet Type, ARP, and IPv4) and two ACE actions (permit and deny). The ACE also contains many detailed, different
parameter options that are available for individual application.
ACL
ACL is an acronym for Access Control List. It is the list table of ACEs, containing access control entries that specify individual
users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects, such as a process or a program.
Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL. The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object
access rights.
ACL implementations can be quite complex, for example, when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation. In networking,
the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server, each with a list of hosts or
servers permitted or denied to use the service. ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic, and in this context,
they are similar to firewalls.
There are 3 web-pages associated with manual ACL configuration:
ACL|Access Control List: The web page shows the ACEs in a prioritized way, highest (top) to lowest (bottom). Default the
table is empty. An ingress frame will only get a hit on one ACE even though there are more matching ACEs. The first matching
ACE will take action (permit/deny) on that frame and a counter associated with that ACE is incremented. An ACE can be
associated with a Policy, 1 ingress port, or any ingress port (the whole switch). If an ACE Policy is created then that Policy can
be associated with a group of ports under the "Ports" web-page. There are number of parameters that can be configured with
an ACE. Read the Web page help text to get further information for each of them. The maximum number of ACEs is 64.
ACL|Ports: The ACL Ports configuration is used to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port. This is useful to group ports to obey
the same traffic rules. Traffic Policy is created under the "Access Control List" - page. You can you also set up specific traffic
properties (Action / Rate Limiter / Port copy, etc) for each ingress port. They will though only apply if the frame gets past the
ACE matching without getting matched. In that case a counter associated with that port is incremented. See the Web page help
text for each specific port property.
ACL|Rate Limiters: Under this page you can configure the rate limiters. There can be 15 different rate limiters, each ranging
from 1-1024K packets per seconds. Under "Ports" and "Access Control List" web-pages you can assign a Rate Limiter ID to the
ACE(s) or ingress port(s).
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 313 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
AES
AES is an acronym for Advanced Encryption Standard. The encryption key protocol is applied in 802.1i standard to improve
WLAN security. It is an encryption standard by the U.S. government, which will replace DES and 3DES. AES has a fixed block
size of 128 bits and a key size of 128, 192, or 256 bits.
Aggregation
Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher
availability. (Also Port Aggregation, Link Aggregation).
ARP
ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol. It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical address,
such as an Ethernet address. ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its
neighbors is known. Before using IP, the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired
destination system.
ARP Inspection
ARP Inspection is a secure feature. Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2
networks by "poisoning" the ARP caches. This feature is used to block such attacks. Only valid ARP requests and responses
can go through the switch device.
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-negotiation is the process where two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be
shared by those devices for a link.
C
CDP
CDP is an acronym for Cisco Discovery Protocol.
D
DDMI
DDMI is an acronym for Digital Diagnostics Monitoring Interface. It provides an enhanced digital diagnostic monitoring interface
for optical transceivers which allows real time access to device operating parameters.
DEI
DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator. It is a 1-bit field in the VLAN tag.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 314 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
DES
DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard. It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting
(enciphering) and decrypting (deciphering) binary coded information.
Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher. Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form
called plaintext. The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which are
based on a binary number called a key.
DHCP
DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to
devices on a network.
DHCP used by networked computers (clients) to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway,
subnet mask, and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server.
The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique, for example, no IP address is assigned to a second client while the
first client's assignment is valid (its lease has not expired). Therefore, IP address pool management is done by the server and
not by a human network administrator.
Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring
an administrator to manage the task. This means that a new computer can be added to a network without the hassle of
manually assigning it a unique IP address.
DHCP Relay
DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the
same subnet domain.
DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client
DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server
DHCP packets to a DHCP client. The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment
policies. Specifically the option works by setting two sub-options: Circuit ID (option 1) and Remote ID (option2). The Circuit ID
sub-option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on. The Remote ID sub-option was
designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit.
The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is "vlan_id" "module_id" "port_no". The parameter of
"vlan_id" is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID. The parameter of "module_id" is the third byte for the module ID (in
standalone switch it always equal 0, in stackable switch it means switch ID). The parameter of "port_no" is the fourth byte and
it means the port number. The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length, and the value is equal the DHCP relay agents MAC address.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 315 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
DHCP Server
DHCP Server is used to allocate network addresses and deliver configuration parameters to dynamically configured hosts
called DHCP client.
DHCP Snooping
DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting a
bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server.
DNS
DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System. It stores and associates many types of information with domain names. Most
importantly, DNS translates human-friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer-friendly IP addresses. For
example, the domain name www.example.com might translate to 192.168.0.1.
Dotted Decimal Notation
Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators between
octets. An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x.y.z.w, where x, y, z, and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255.
Drop Precedence Level
Every incoming frame is classified to a Drop Precedence Level (DP level), which is used throughout the device for providing
congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific DP level. A DP level of 0 (zero)
corresponds to 'Committed' (Green) frames and a DP level of 1 corresponds to 'Discard Eligible' (Yellow) frames.
DSCP
DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point. It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification
purposes.
E
ECE
ECE is EVC Control Entries. These rules are ordered in a list to control the preferred classification.
EEE
EEE ( Energy Efficient Ethernet) is defined in IEEE 802.3az.
EPS
EPS is an abbreviation for Ethernet Protection Switching defined in ITU/T G.8031.
Ethernet Type
Ethernet Type, or EtherType, is a field in the Ethernet MAC header, defined by the Ethernet networking standard. It is used to
indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 316 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
F
FTP
FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol. It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and
provides file writing and reading. It also provides directory service and security features.
Fast Leave
Multicast snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding-table entry without first
sending out group specific queries to the interface. The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group
specified in the original leave message. Fast-leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a
switched network, even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously. This processing applies to IGMP and MLD.
H
HTTP
HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol. It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the World
Wide Web (WWW). HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted, and what actions Web servers and browsers
should take in response to various commands. For example, when you enter a URL in your browser, this actually sends an
HTTP command to the Web server directing it to fetch and transmit the requested Web page. The other main standard that
controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML, which covers how Web pages are formatted and displayed.
Any Web server machine contains, in addition to the Web page files it can serve, an HTTP daemon, a program that is designed
to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive. The Web browser is an HTTP client, sending requests to server
machines. An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) connection to a particular
port on a remote host (port 80 by default). An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message.
HTTPS
HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer. It is used to indicate a secure HTTP
connection. HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for
security-sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons.
HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape's Secure Socket Layer (SSL) as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application
layering. (HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer, TCP/IP). SSL uses a 40-bit key
size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 317 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
I
ICMP
ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol. It is a protocol that generated the error response, diagnostic or
routing purposes. ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as
time-stamp or echo transactions. For example, the PING command uses ICMP to test an Internet connection.
IEEE 802.1X
IEEE 802.1X is an IEEE standard for port-based Network Access Control. It provides authentication to devices attached to a
LAN port, establishing a point-to-point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication fails. With 802.1X,
access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server, which means that authorized users can use the same
credentials for authentication from any point within the network.
IGMP
IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol. It is a communications protocol used to manage the
membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups. IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
multicast group memberships. It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification, like ICMP for unicast connections. IGMP
can be used for online video and gaming, and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these uses.
IGMP Querier
A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link. This router is called the Querier. There will be only one IGMP
Querier that wins Querier election on a particular link.
IP
IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol. It is a protocol used for communicating data across an internet network.
IP is a "best effort" system, which means that no packet of information sent over is assured to reach its destination in the same
condition it was sent. Each device connected to a Local Area Network (LAN) or Wide Area Network (WAN) is given an Internet
Protocol address, and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended
network.
The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4, which has 32-bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four
billion unique addresses. This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks,
the bulk of which remain unused. There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol, IPv6,
which would have 128-bits Internet Protocol addresses. This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty-nine
zeroes after it. However, IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 318 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
IPMC
IPMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast. IPMC supports IPv4 and IPv6 multicasting. IPMCv4 denotes multicast for IPv4. IPMCv6
denotes multicast for IPv6.
IPMC Profile
IPMC Profile is an acronym for IP MultiCast Profile. IPMC Profile is used to deploy the access control on IP multicast streams.
IP Source Guard
IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the
DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings. It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to
spoof and use the IP address of another host.
L
LACP
LACP is an IEEE 802.3ad standard protocol. The Link Aggregation Control Protocol, allows bundling several physical ports
together to form a single logical port.
LLC
The IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) protocol provides a link mechanism for upper layer protocols. It is the upper
sub-layer of the Data Link Layer and provides multiplexing mechanisms that make it possible for several network protocols (IP,
IPX) to coexist within a multipoint network. LLC header consists of 1 byte DSAP (Destination Service Access Point), 1 byte
SSAP (Source Service Access Point), 1 or 2 bytes Control field followed by LLC information.
LLDP
LLDP is an IEEE 802.1ab standard protocol. The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) specified in this standard allows
stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise, to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN, the major capabilities
provided by the system incorporating that station, the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide
management of those capabilities, and the identification of the stations point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by
those management entity or entities. The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard
Management Information Base (MIB), making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System
(NMS) using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
LLDP-MED
LLDP-MED is an extension of IEEE 802.1ab and is defined by the telecommunication industry association (TIA-1057).
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 319 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
LLQI
LLQI (Last Listener Query Interval) is the maximum response time used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted
into Specific Queries. It is used to detect the departure of the last listener for a multicast address or source. In IGMP, this term
is called LMQI (Last Member Query Interval).
LOC
LOC is an acronym for Loss Of Connectivity and is detected by a MEP and is indicating lost connectivity in the network. Can be
used as a switch criteria by EPS.
M
MAC Table
Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame. The switch builds up a table that maps MAC
addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to ( based upon the DMAC address in the frame ). This
table contains both static and dynamic entries. The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the
administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports.
The frames also contain a MAC address (SMAC address), which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame.
The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses. Dynamic
entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable
age time.
MD5
MD5 is an acronym for Message-Digest algorithm 5. MD5 is a message digest algorithm, used cryptographic hash function with
a 128-bit hash value. It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991. MD5 is officially defined in RFC 1321 - The MD5 Message-Digest
Algorithm.
Mirroring
For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic, the switch system can be configured to mirror frames from
multiple ports to a mirror port. (In this context, mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame.)
Both incoming (source) and outgoing (destination) frames can be mirrored to the mirror port.
MLD
MLD is an acronym for Multicast Listener Discovery for IPv6. MLD is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a
directly attached link, much as IGMP is used in IPv4. The protocol is embedded in ICMPv6 instead of using a separate protocol.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 320 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
MLD Querier
A router sends MLD Query messages onto a particular link. This router is called the Querier. There will be only one MLD
Querier that wins Querier election on a particular link.
MSTP
In 2002, the IEEE introduced an evolution of RSTP: the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The MSTP protocol provides for
multiple spanning tree instances, while ensuring RSTP and STP compatibility. The standard was originally defined by IEEE
802.1s, but was later incorporated in IEEE 802.1D-2005.
MVR
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is a protocol for Layer 2 (IP)-networks that enables multicast-traffic from a source VLAN to
be shared with subscriber-VLANs.
The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core network,
instead the stream(s) are received on the MVR-VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have requested it/them
(Wikipedia).
N
NAS
NAS is an acronym for Network Access Server. The NAS is meant to act as a gateway to guard access to a protected source.
A client connects to the NAS, and the NAS connects to another resource asking whether the client's supplied credentials are
valid. Based on the answer, the NAS then allows or disallows access to the protected resource. An example of a NAS
implementation is IEEE 802.1X.
NTP
NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems. NTP uses
UDP (datagrams) as transport layer.
O
Optional TLVs
An LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs. For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame.
These TLVs are known as optional TLVs. If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the
LLDP frame.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 321 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
OUI
OUI is the organizationally unique identifier. An OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE. You
can determine which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address which forms the first 24 bits of a MAC address.
P
PCP
PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point. It is a 3-bit field storing the priority level for the 802.1Q frame. It is also known as
User Priority.
PHY
PHY is an abbreviation for Physical Interface Transceiver and is the device that implement the Ethernet physical layer
(IEEE-802.3).
PING
ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to generate a
response from that computer. The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets. Ping was
created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected.
ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packets. The PING Request is the packet from the origin computer, and
the PING Reply is the packet response from the target.
Policer
A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames. It is located in front of the ingress queue.
Private VLAN
In a private VLAN, PVLANs provide layer 2 isolation between ports within the same broadcast domain. Isolated ports
configured as part of PVLAN cannot communicate with each other. Member ports of a PVLAN can communicate with each
other.
PTP
PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems.
Q
QCE
QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry. It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID. There are six QCE
frame types: Ethernet Type, VLAN, UDP/TCP Port, DSCP, TOS, and Tag Priority. Frames can be classified by one of 4
different QoS classes: "Low", "Normal", "Medium", and "High" for individual application.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 322 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
QCL
QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List. It is the list table of QCEs, containing QoS control entries that classify to a specific
QoS class on specific traffic objects. Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL. The privileges determine
specific traffic object to specific QoS class.
QoS
QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service. It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual applications
or protocols.
A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data, including high-quality video and delay-sensitive
data such as real-time voice. Networks must provide secure, predictable, measurable, and sometimes guaranteed services.
Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end-to-end business solution. Therefore, QoS is the set of
techniques to manage network resources.
QoS class
Every incoming frame is classified to a QoS class, which is used throughout the device for providing queuing, scheduling and
congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific QoS class. There is a one to one
mapping between QoS class, queue and priority. A QoS class of 0 (zero) has the lowest priority.
Querier Election
Querier election is used to dedicate the Querier, the only one router sends Query messages, on a particular link. Querier
election rule defines that IGMP Querier or MLD Querier with the lowest IPv4/IPv6 address wins the election.
R
RARP
RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol. It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a given
hardware address, such as an Ethernet address. RARP is the complement of ARP.
RADIUS
RADIUS is an acronym for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service. It is a networking protocol that provides centralized
access, authorization and accounting management for people or computers to connect and use a network service.
Router Port
A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads switch towards the Layer 3 multicast device.
RSTP
In 1998, the IEEE with document 802.1w introduced an evolution of STP: the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, which provides for
faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. Standard IEEE 802.1D-2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes
STP, while at the same time being backwards-compatible with STP.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 323 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
S
sFlow
sFlow is an industry standard technology for monitoring switched networks through random sampling of packets on switch ports
and time-based sampling of port counters. The sampled packets and counters (referred to as flow samples and counter
samples, respectively) are sent as sFlow UDP datagrams to a central network traffic monitoring server. This central server is
called an sFlow receiver or sFlow collector. Additional information can be found at http://sflow.org.
SHA
SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm. It designed by the National Security Agency (NSA) and published by the NIST
as a U.S. Federal Information Processing Standard. Hash algorithms compute a fixed-length digital representation (known as a
message digest) of an input data sequence (the message) of any length.
Shaper
A shaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames. It is located after the ingress queues.
SNAP
The SubNetwork Access Protocol (SNAP) is a mechanism for multiplexing, on networks using IEEE 802.2 LLC, more protocols
than can be distinguished by the 8-bit 802.2 Service Access Point (SAP) fields. SNAP supports identifying protocols by
Ethernet type field values; it also supports vendor-private protocol identifier.
SNMP
SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol. It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol for network management. SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network
management architecture. It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change
notices from network devices implementing SNMP.
SNTP
SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems.
SNTP uses UDP (datagrams) as transport layer.
SSH
SSH is an acronym for Secure SHell. It is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure channel between
two networked devices. The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality and integrity of data over an insecure network.
The goal of SSH was to replace the earlier rlogin, TELNET and rsh protocols, which did not provide strong authentication or
guarantee confidentiality (Wikipedia).
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 324 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
STP
Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer-2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN. The original STP
protocol is now obsolete by RSTP.
T
TACACS+
TACACS+ is an acronym for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus. It is a networking protocol which
provides access control for routers, network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more
centralized servers. TACACS+ provides separate authentication, authorization and accounting services.
TCP
TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol. It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol (IP) to
exchange the messages between computers. The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in-order delivery of data from sender
to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications (for example, Web server and e-mail
server) running on the same host.
The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another. It is known as a connection-oriented
protocol, which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be
exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged. TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is
divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back into the complete message at the other end.
Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web (WWW), e-mail, and File Transfer Protocol (FTP).
TELNET
TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork. It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol
(TCP) and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client.
TELNET enables the client to control the server and communicate with other servers on the network. To start a Telnet session,
the client user must log in to a server by entering a valid username and password. Then, the client user can enter commands
through the Telnet program just as if they were entering commands directly on the server console.
TFTP
TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol. It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and
provides file writing and reading, but it does not provide directory service and security features.
TLV
TLV is an acronym for Type Length Value. A LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information. Each of these pieces of
information is known as TLV.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 325 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
U
UDP
UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol. It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol (IP) to
exchange the messages between computers.
UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) that uses the Internet Protocol (IP). Unlike TCP, UDP does
not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams, and UDP doesn't provide reassembling and sequencing
of the packets. This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has
arrived and is in the right order. Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units
to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP.
UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer. It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and,
optionally, a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact. Common network applications that use UDP include the
Domain Name System (DNS), streaming media applications such as IPTV, Voice over IP (VoIP), and Trivial File Transfer
Protocol (TFTP).
UPnP
UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play. The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify
the implementation of networks in the home (data sharing, communications, and entertainment) and in corporate environments
for simplified installation of computer components
User Priority
User Priority is a 3-bit field storing the priority level for the 802.1Q frame. It is also known as PCP.
V
VLAN
Virtual LAN. A method to restrict communication between switch ports. At layer 2, the network is partioned into multiple, distinct,
mutually isolated broadcast domains.
VLAN ID
VLAN ID is a 12-bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs.
Voice VLAN
Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic. By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN, you
can perform QoS-related configuration for voice data, ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 326 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
W
WRED
WRED ( Weighted Random Early Detection) is an active queue management mechanism that provides preferential treatment
of higher priority frames when traffic builds up within a queue. A frame's DP level is used as input to WRED. A higher DP level
assigned to a frame results in a higher probability that the frame is dropped during times of congestion.
WTR
WTR is an acronym for Wait To Restore. This is the time a fail on a resource has to be 'not active' before restoration back to this
(previously failing) resource is done.
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 327 of 328
Transition Networks
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide
Transition Networks
10900 Red Circle Drive
Minnetonka, MN 55343 USA
tel: +1.952.941.7600 | toll free: 1.800.526.9267 | fax: 952.941.2322
sales@transition.com
| techsupport@transition.com
| customerservice@transition.com
Copyright© 2017 Transition Networks. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
SISGM1040-184D-LRT Web User Guide 33710 Rev. A
33710 Rev. A
https://www.transition.com
Page 328 of 328
Download PDF
Similar pages